implemented according to the design of each platform and/or application requiring them.
gtk.c.types
C types for gtk4 library
Types 711
The rectangle representing the area allocated for a widget by its parent.
The priority of an accessibility announcement.
The possible values for the gtk.types.AccessibleProperty.Autocomplete accessible property.
The possible values for the gtk.types.AccessibleState.Invalid accessible state.
Note that the gtk.types.AccessibleInvalidState.False and gtk.types.AccessibleInvalidState.True have the same values as false and true.
The various platform states which can be queried using gtk.accessible.Accessible.getPlatformState.
The possible accessible properties of a gtk.accessible.Accessible.
The possible accessible relations of a gtk.accessible.Accessible.
Accessible relations can be references to other widgets, integers or strings.
The accessible role for a gtk.accessible.Accessible implementation.
Abstract roles are only used as part of the ontology; application developers must not use abstract roles in their code.
The possible values for the gtk.types.AccessibleProperty.Sort accessible property.
The possible accessible states of a gtk.accessible.Accessible.
The type of contents change operation.
The granularity for queries about the text contents of a gtk.accessible_text.AccessibleText implementation.
The possible values for the gtk.types.AccessibleState.Pressed accessible state.
Note that the gtk.types.AccessibleTristate.False and gtk.types.AccessibleTristate.True have the same values as false and true.
Controls how a widget deals with extra space in a single dimension.
Alignment only matters if the widget receives a “too large” allocation, for example if you packed the widget with the gtk.widget.Widget.hexpand property inside a gtk.box.Box, then the widget might get extra space. If you have for example a 16x16 icon inside a 32x32 space, the icon could be scaled and stretched, it could be centered, or it could be positioned to one side of the space.
Note that in horizontal context gtk.types.Align.Start and gtk.types.Align.End are interpreted relative to text direction.
Baseline support is optional for containers and widgets, and is only available for vertical alignment. `GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE_CENTER and gtk.types.Align.BaselineFill are treated similar to gtk.types.Align.Center and gtk.types.Align.Fill, except that it positions the widget to line up the baselines, where that is supported.
Types of user actions that may be blocked by gtk.application.Application.
Used to indicate the direction in which an arrow should point.
Determines the page role inside a gtk.assistant.Assistant.
The role is used to handle buttons sensitivity and visibility.
Note that an assistant needs to end its page flow with a page of type gtk.types.AssistantPageType.Confirm, gtk.types.AssistantPageType.Summary or gtk.types.AssistantPageType.Progress to be correct.
The Cancel button will only be shown if the page isn’t “committed”. See gtk.assistant.Assistant.commit for details.
Baseline position in a row of widgets.
Whenever a container has some form of natural row it may align children in that row along a common typographical baseline. If the amount of vertical space in the row is taller than the total requested height of the baseline-aligned children then it can use a gtk.types.BaselinePosition to select where to put the baseline inside the extra available space.
Describes how the border of a UI element should be rendered.
The list of flags that can be passed to gtk.builder.Builder.createClosure.
New values may be added in the future for new features, so external implementations of gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope should test the flags for unknown values and raise a gtk.types.BuilderError.InvalidAttribute error when they encounter one.
Error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using gtk.builder.Builder.
Prebuilt sets of buttons for gtk.dialog.Dialog.
If none of these choices are appropriate, simply use gtk.types.ButtonsType.None and call gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButtons.
Please note that gtk.types.ButtonsType.Ok, gtk.types.ButtonsType.YesNoand gtk.types.ButtonsType.OkCancel are discouraged by the GNOME Human Interface Guidelines.
The available modes for gtk.cell_renderer_accel.CellRendererAccel.accelMode.
Identifies how the user can interact with a particular cell.
Tells how a cell is to be rendered.
Describes how a gtk.string_sorter.StringSorter turns strings into sort keys to compare them.
Note that the result of sorting will in general depend on the current locale unless the mode is @GTK_COLLATION_NONE.
The widget attributes that can be used when creating a gtk.constraint.Constraint.
The relation between two terms of a constraint.
The strength of a constraint, expressed as a symbolic constant.
The strength of a gtk.constraint.Constraint can be expressed with any positive integer; the values of this enumeration can be used for readability.
Domain for VFL parsing errors.
Controls how a content should be made to fit inside an allocation.
Specifies which corner a child widget should be placed in when packed into a GtkScrolledWindow.
This is effectively the opposite of where the scroll bars are placed.
Errors that can occur while parsing CSS.
These errors are unexpected and will cause parts of the given CSS to be ignored.
Warnings that can occur while parsing CSS.
Unlike gtk.types.CssParserErrors, warnings do not cause the parser to skip any input, but they indicate issues that should be fixed.
Flags to use with gtk.global.setDebugFlags.
Settings these flags causes GTK to print out different types of debugging information. Some of these flags are only available when GTK has been configured with -Ddebug=true.
Passed to various keybinding signals for deleting text.
Error codes in the GTK_DIALOG_ERROR domain that can be returned by async dialog functions.
Flags used to influence dialog construction.
Focus movement types.
The identifiers for gtk.editable.Editable properties.
See gtk.editable.Editable.installProperties for details on how to implement the gtk.editable.Editable interface.
Specifies the side of the entry at which an icon is placed.
Describes the behavior of a gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.
Describes the state of a gdk.event_sequence.EventSequence in a gtk.gesture.Gesture.
Describes whether a gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser is being used to open existing files or to save to a possibly new file.
These identify the various errors that can occur while calling gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser functions.
Describes changes in a filter in more detail and allows objects using the filter to optimize refiltering items.
If you are writing an implementation and are not sure which value to pass, gtk.types.FilterChange.Different is always a correct choice.
Describes the known strictness of a filter.
Note that for filters where the strictness is not known, gtk.types.FilterMatch.Some is always an acceptable value, even if a filter does match all or no items.
Specifies the granularity of font selection that is desired in a gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.
This enumeration may be extended in the future; applications should ignore unknown values.
The level of granularity for the font selection.
Depending on this value, the pango.font_description.FontDescription that is returned by gtk.font_dialog_button.FontDialogButton.getFontDesc will have more or less fields set.
Represents the state of graphics offlodading.
Used to specify options for gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme.lookupIcon.
Built-in icon sizes.
Icon sizes default to being inherited. Where they cannot be inherited, text size is the default.
All widgets which use gtk.types.IconSize set the normal-icons or large-icons style classes correspondingly, and let themes determine the actual size to be used with the -gtk-icon-size CSS property.
Error codes for gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme operations.
An enum for determining where a dropped item goes.
Describes the image data representation used by a gtk.image.Image.
If you want to get the image from the widget, you can only get the currently-stored representation; for instance, if the gtk.image.Image.getStorageType returns gtk.types.ImageType.Paintable, then you can call gtk.image.Image.getPaintable.
For empty images, you can request any storage type (call any of the "get" functions), but they will all return null values.
Describes hints that might be taken into account by input methods or applications.
Note that input methods may already tailor their behaviour according to the gtk.types.InputPurpose of the entry.
Some common sense is expected when using these flags - mixing gtk.types.InputHints.Lowercase with any of the uppercase hints makes no sense.
This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should ignore unknown values.
Describes primary purpose of the input widget.
This information is useful for on-screen keyboards and similar input methods to decide which keys should be presented to the user.
Note that the purpose is not meant to impose a totally strict rule about allowed characters, and does not replace input validation. It is fine for an on-screen keyboard to let the user override the character set restriction that is expressed by the purpose. The application is expected to validate the entry contents, even if it specified a purpose.
The difference between gtk.types.InputPurpose.Digits and gtk.types.InputPurpose.Number is that the former accepts only digits while the latter also some punctuation (like commas or points, plus, minus) and “e” or “E” as in 3.14E+000.
This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should interpret unknown values as “free form”.
The different methods to handle text in #GtkInscription when it doesn't fit the available space.
Used for justifying the text inside a gtk.label.Label widget.
Describes how gtk.level_bar.LevelBar contents should be rendered.
Note that this enumeration could be extended with additional modes in the future.
The type of license for an application.
This enumeration can be expanded at later date.
List of actions to perform when scrolling to items in a list widget.
Used to configure the focus behavior in the gtk.types.DirectionType.TabForward and gtk.types.DirectionType.TabBackward direction, like the <kbd>Tab</kbd> key in a gtk.list_view.ListView.
The type of message being displayed in a gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog.
Passed as argument to various keybinding signals for moving the cursor position.
Options for selecting a different wrap mode for natural size requests.
See for example the gtk.label.Label.naturalWrapMode property.
The parameter used in the action signals of gtk.notebook.Notebook.
Used to determine the layout of pages on a sheet when printing multiple pages per sheet.
Describes the way two values can be compared.
These values can be used with a glib.types.CompareFunc. However, a glib.types.CompareFunc is allowed to return any integer values. For converting such a value to a gtk.types.Ordering value, use func@Gtk.Ordering.from_cmpfunc.
Represents the orientation of widgets and other objects.
Typical examples are gtk.box.Box or gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan.
Defines how content overflowing a given area should be handled.
This is used in gtk.widget.Widget.setOverflow. The gtk.widget.Widget.overflow property is modeled after the CSS overflow property, but implements it only partially.
Represents the packing location of a children in its parent.
See gtk.window_controls.WindowControls for example.
The type of a pad action.
See also gtk.print_job.PrintJob.setPageSet.
Describes the panning direction of a gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan.
Flags that influence the behavior of gtk.widget.Widget.pick.
Determines how the size should be computed to achieve the one of the visibility mode for the scrollbars.
Flags that affect how gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu widgets built from a gio.menu_model.MenuModel are created and displayed.
Describes which edge of a widget a certain feature is positioned at.
For examples, see the tabs of a gtk.notebook.Notebook, or the label of a gtk.scale.Scale.
Specifies which features the print dialog should offer.
If neither gtk.types.PrintCapabilities.GeneratePdf nor gtk.types.PrintCapabilities.GeneratePs is specified, GTK assumes that all formats are supported.
Error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using the GTK printing support.
Determines what action the print operation should perform.
A parameter of this typs is passed to gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.run.
The result of a print operation.
A value of this type is returned by gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.run.
See also gtk.print_job.PrintJob.setPages
The status gives a rough indication of the completion of a running print operation.
Describes limits of a gtk.event_controller.EventController for handling events targeting other widgets.
Describes the stage at which events are fed into a gtk.event_controller.EventController.
Error codes for gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager operations
Predefined values for use as response ids in gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButton.
All predefined values are negative; GTK leaves values of 0 or greater for application-defined response ids.
These enumeration values describe the possible transitions when the child of a gtk.revealer.Revealer widget is shown or hidden.
Passed as argument to various keybinding signals.
Scrolling types.
Defines the policy to be used in a scrollable widget when updating the scrolled window adjustments in a given orientation.
Used to control what selections users are allowed to make.
Determines how GTK handles the sensitivity of various controls, such as combo box buttons.
List of flags that can be passed to action activation.
More flags may be added in the future.
Describes where gtk.shortcut.Shortcuts added to a gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController get handled.
GtkShortcutType specifies the kind of shortcut that is being described.
More values may be added to this enumeration over time.
The mode of the size group determines the directions in which the size group affects the requested sizes of its component widgets.
Specifies a preference for height-for-width or width-for-height geometry management.
Determines the direction of a sort.
Describes changes in a sorter in more detail and allows users to optimize resorting.
Describes the type of order that a gtk.sorter.Sorter may produce.
Determines whether the spin button displays values outside the adjustment bounds.
The values of the GtkSpinType enumeration are used to specify the change to make in gtk.spin_button.SpinButton.spin.
Possible transitions between pages in a gtk.stack.Stack widget.
New values may be added to this enumeration over time.
Describes a widget state.
Widget states are used to match the widget against CSS pseudo-classes. Note that GTK extends the regular CSS classes and sometimes uses different names.
Specifies how search strings are matched inside text.
Flags that modify the behavior of gtk.style_context.StyleContext.toString_.
New values may be added to this enumeration.
The indexes of colors passed to symbolic color rendering, such as vfunc@Gtk.SymbolicPaintable.snapshot_symbolic.
More values may be added over time.
Values that can be passed to the vfunc@Gtk.Widget.system_setting_changed vfunc.
The values indicate which system setting has changed. Widgets may need to drop caches, or react otherwise.
Most of the values correspond to gtk.settings.Settings properties.
More values may be added over time.
Reading directions for text.
Granularity types that extend the text selection. Use the GtkTextView::extend-selection signal to customize the selection.
Flags affecting how a search is done.
If neither gtk.types.TextSearchFlags.VisibleOnly nor gtk.types.TextSearchFlags.TextOnly are enabled, the match must be exact; the special 0xFFFC character will match embedded paintables or child widgets.
Used to reference the layers of gtk.text_view.TextView for the purpose of customized drawing with the ::snapshot_layer vfunc.
Used to reference the parts of gtk.text_view.TextView.
These flags indicate various properties of a gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.
They are returned by gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.getFlags, and must be static for the lifetime of the object. A more complete description of gtk.types.TreeModelFlags.ItersPersist can be found in the overview of this section.
The sizing method the column uses to determine its width. Please note that gtk.types.TreeViewColumnSizing.Autosize are inefficient for large views, and can make columns appear choppy.
An enum for determining where a dropped row goes.
Used to indicate which grid lines to draw in a tree view.
Describes a type of line wrapping.
gtk.atcontext.ATContext is an abstract class provided by GTK to communicate to platform-specific assistive technologies API.
Each platform supported by GTK implements a gtk.atcontext.ATContext subclass, and is responsible for updating the accessible state in response to state changes in gtk.accessible.Accessible.
The gtk.about_dialog.AboutDialog offers a simple way to display information about a program.
The shown information includes the programs' logo, name, copyright, website and license. It is also possible to give credits to the authors, documenters, translators and artists who have worked on the program.
An about dialog is typically opened when the user selects the About option from the Help menu. All parts of the dialog are optional.
About dialogs often contain links and email addresses. gtk.about_dialog.AboutDialog displays these as clickable links. By default, it calls gtk.file_launcher.FileLauncher.launch when a user clicks one. The behaviour can be overridden with the gtk.about_dialog.AboutDialog.activateLink signal.
To specify a person with an email address, use a string like Edgar Allan Poe <edgar@poe.com>. To specify a website with a title, use a string like GTK team https://www.gtk.org.
To make constructing a gtk.about_dialog.AboutDialog as convenient as possible, you can use the function func@Gtk.show_about_dialog which constructs and shows a dialog and keeps it around so that it can be shown again.
Note that GTK sets a default title of _("About %s") on the dialog window (where %s is replaced by the name of the application, but in order to ensure proper translation of the title, applications should set the title property explicitly when constructing a gtk.about_dialog.AboutDialog, as shown in the following example:
GFile *logo_file = g_file_new_for_path ("./logo.png");
GdkTexture *example_logo = gdk_texture_new_from_file (logo_file, NULL);
g_object_unref (logo_file);
gtk_show_about_dialog (NULL,
"program-name", "ExampleCode",
"logo", example_logo,
"title", _("About ExampleCode"),
NULL);CSS nodes
gtk.about_dialog.AboutDialog has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .aboutdialog.
gtk.accessible.Accessible is an interface for describing UI elements for Assistive Technologies.
Every accessible implementation has:
- a “role”, represented by a value of the gtk.types.AccessibleRole enumeration
- an “attribute”, represented by a set of gtk.types.AccessibleState, gtk.types.AccessibleProperty and gtk.types.AccessibleRelation values
The role cannot be changed after instantiating a gtk.accessible.Accessible implementation.
The attributes are updated every time a UI element's state changes in a way that should be reflected by assistive technologies. For instance, if a gtk.widget.Widget visibility changes, the gtk.types.AccessibleState.Hidden state will also change to reflect the gtk.widget.Widget.visible property.
Every accessible implementation is part of a tree of accessible objects. Normally, this tree corresponds to the widget tree, but can be customized by reimplementing the vfunc@Gtk.Accessible.get_accessible_parent, vfunc@Gtk.Accessible.get_first_accessible_child and vfunc@Gtk.Accessible.get_next_accessible_sibling virtual functions. Note that you can not create a top-level accessible object as of now, which means that you must always have a parent accessible object. Also note that when an accessible object does not correspond to a widget, and it has children, whose implementation you don't control, it is necessary to ensure the correct shape of the a11y tree by calling gtk.accessible.Accessible.setAccessibleParent and updating the sibling by gtk.accessible.Accessible.updateNextAccessibleSibling.
The common interface for accessible objects.
GTypeInterface gIfaceGtkATContext * function(GtkAccessible * self) getAtContextretrieve the platform-specific accessibility context for the accessible implementationgboolean function(GtkAccessible * self, GtkAccessiblePlatformState state) getPlatformStateretrieve the accessible stateGtkAccessible * function(GtkAccessible * self) getAccessibleParentGtkAccessible * function(GtkAccessible * self) getFirstAccessibleChildGtkAccessible * function(GtkAccessible * self) getNextAccessibleSiblinggboolean function(GtkAccessible * self, int * x, int * y, int * width, int * height) getBoundsA boxed type which wraps a list of references to GtkAccessible objects.
This interface describes ranged controls, e.g. controls which have a single value within an allowed range and that can optionally be changed by the user.
This interface is expected to be implemented by controls using the following roles:
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Meter
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ProgressBar
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Scrollbar
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Slider
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.SpinButton
If that is not the case, a warning will be issued at run time.
In addition to this interface, its implementers are expected to provide the correct values for the following properties:
GTypeInterface gIfacegboolean function(GtkAccessibleRange * self, double value) setCurrentValueAn interface for accessible objects containing formatted text.
The gtk.accessible_text.AccessibleText interfaces is meant to be implemented by accessible objects that have text formatted with attributes, or non-trivial text contents.
You should use the enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty.LABEL or the enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty.DESCRIPTION properties for accessible objects containing simple, unformatted text.
The interface vtable for accessible objects containing text.
GTypeInterface gIfaceGBytes * function(GtkAccessibleText * self, uint start, uint end) getContentsGBytes * function(GtkAccessibleText * self, uint offset, GtkAccessibleTextGranularity granularity, uint * start, uint * end) getContentsAtuint function(GtkAccessibleText * self) getCaretPositiongboolean function(GtkAccessibleText * self, size_t * nRanges, GtkAccessibleTextRange * * ranges) getSelectiongboolean function(GtkAccessibleText * self, uint offset, size_t * nRanges, GtkAccessibleTextRange * * ranges, char * * * attributeNames, char * * * attributeValues) getAttributesvoid function(GtkAccessibleText * self, char * * * attributeNames, char * * * attributeValues) getDefaultAttributesA range inside the text of an accessible object.
size_t startthe start of the range, in characterssize_t lengththe length of the range, in charactersgtk.action_bar.ActionBar is designed to present contextual actions.
It is expected to be displayed below the content and expand horizontally to fill the area.
It allows placing children at the start or the end. In addition, it contains an internal centered box which is centered with respect to the full width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space.
GtkActionBar as GtkBuildable
The gtk.action_bar.ActionBar implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports adding children at the start or end sides by specifying “start” or “end” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element, or setting the center widget by specifying “center” value.
CSS nodes
actionbar
╰── revealer
╰── box
├── box.start
│ ╰── [start children]
├── [center widget]
╰── box.end
╰── [end children]A gtk.action_bar.ActionBar's CSS node is called actionbar. It contains a revealer subnode, which contains a box subnode, which contains two box subnodes at the start and end of the action bar, with start and `end style classes respectively, as well as a center node that represents the center child.
Each of the boxes contains children packed for that side.
The gtk.actionable.Actionable interface provides a convenient way of associating widgets with actions.
It primarily consists of two properties: gtk.actionable.Actionable.actionName and gtk.actionable.Actionable.actionTarget. There are also some convenience APIs for setting these properties.
The action will be looked up in action groups that are found among the widgets ancestors. Most commonly, these will be the actions with the “win.” or “app.” prefix that are associated with the gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow or gtk.application.Application, but other action groups that are added with gtk.widget.Widget.insertActionGroup will be consulted as well.
The interface vtable for gtk.actionable.Actionable.
GTypeInterface gIfaceconst(char) * function(GtkActionable * actionable) getActionNamevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.getActionName]void function(GtkActionable * actionable, const(char) * actionName) setActionNamevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.setActionName]GVariant * function(GtkActionable * actionable) getActionTargetValuevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.getActionTargetValue]void function(GtkActionable * actionable, GVariant * targetValue) setActionTargetValuevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.setActionTargetValue]A gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction that calls gtk.widget.Widget.activate.
gtk.adjustment.Adjustment is a model for a numeric value.
The gtk.adjustment.Adjustment has an associated lower and upper bound. It also contains step and page increments, and a page size.
Adjustments are used within several GTK widgets, including gtk.spin_button.SpinButton, gtk.viewport.Viewport, gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar and gtk.scale.Scale.
The gtk.adjustment.Adjustment object does not update the value itself. Instead it is left up to the owner of the gtk.adjustment.Adjustment to control the value.
GInitiallyUnowned parentInstanceGInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassvoid function(GtkAdjustment * adjustment) changedvoid function(GtkAdjustment * adjustment) valueChangedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A gtk.alert_dialog.AlertDialog object collects the arguments that are needed to present a message to the user.
The message is shown with the gtk.alert_dialog.AlertDialog.choose function. This API follows the GIO async pattern, and the result can be obtained by calling gtk.alert_dialog.AlertDialog.chooseFinish.
If you don't need to wait for a button to be clicked, you can use gtk.alert_dialog.AlertDialog.show.
GObjectClass parentClassA gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger that combines two triggers.
The gtk.alternative_trigger.AlternativeTrigger triggers when either of two trigger.
This can be cascaded to combine more than two triggers.
gtk.any_filter.AnyFilter matches an item when at least one of its filters matches.
To add filters to a gtk.any_filter.AnyFilter, use gtk.multi_filter.MultiFilter.append.
gtk.app_chooser.AppChooser is an interface for widgets which allow the user to choose an application.
The main objects that implement this interface are gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget, gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog and gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.
Applications are represented by GIO gio.app_info.AppInfo objects here. GIO has a concept of recommended and fallback applications for a given content type. Recommended applications are those that claim to handle the content type itself, while fallback also includes applications that handle a more generic content type. GIO also knows the default and last-used application for a given content type. The gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget provides detailed control over whether the shown list of applications should include default, recommended or fallback applications.
To obtain the application that has been selected in a gtk.app_chooser.AppChooser, use gtk.app_chooser.AppChooser.getAppInfo.
Deprecated
The gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton lets the user select an application.
!An example GtkAppChooserButton
Initially, a gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton selects the first application in its list, which will either be the most-recently used application or, if gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.showDefaultItem is true, the default application.
The list of applications shown in a gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton includes the recommended applications for the given content type. When gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.showDefaultItem is set, the default application is also included. To let the user chooser other applications, you can set the gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.showDialogItem property, which allows to open a full gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog.
It is possible to add custom items to the list, using gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.appendCustomItem. These items cause the gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.customItemActivated signal to be emitted when they are selected.
To track changes in the selected application, use the gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.changed signal.
CSS nodes
gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton has a single CSS node with the name “appchooserbutton”.
Deprecated
implemented according to the design of each platform and/or application requiring them.
gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog shows a gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget inside a gtk.dialog.Dialog.
!An example GtkAppChooserDialog
Note that gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog does not have any interesting methods of its own. Instead, you should get the embedded gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget using gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog.getWidget and call its methods if the generic gtk.app_chooser.AppChooser interface is not sufficient for your needs.
To set the heading that is shown above the gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget, use gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog.setHeading.
CSS nodes
gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .appchooser.
Deprecated
implemented according to the design of each platform and/or application requiring them.
gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget is a widget for selecting applications.
It is the main building block for gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog. Most applications only need to use the latter; but you can use this widget as part of a larger widget if you have special needs.
gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget offers detailed control over what applications are shown, using the gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget.showDefault, gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget.showRecommended, gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget.showFallback, gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget.showOther and gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget.showAll properties. See the gtk.app_chooser.AppChooser documentation for more information about these groups of applications.
To keep track of the selected application, use the gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget.applicationSelected and gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget.applicationActivated signals.
CSS nodes
gtk.app_chooser_widget.AppChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name appchooser.
Deprecated
implemented according to the design of each platform and/or application requiring them.
gtk.application.Application is a high-level API for writing applications.
It supports many aspects of writing a GTK application in a convenient fashion, without enforcing a one-size-fits-all model.
Currently, gtk.application.Application handles GTK initialization, application uniqueness, session management, provides some basic scriptability and desktop shell integration by exporting actions and menus and manages a list of toplevel windows whose life-cycle is automatically tied to the life-cycle of your application.
While gtk.application.Application works fine with plain gtk.window.Windows, it is recommended to use it together with gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow.
Automatic resources
gtk.application.Application will automatically load menus from the gtk.builder.Builder resource located at "gtk/menus.ui", relative to the application's resource base path (see gio.application.Application.setResourceBasePath). The menu with the ID "menubar" is taken as the application's menubar. Additional menus (most interesting submenus) can be named and accessed via gtk.application.Application.getMenuById which allows for dynamic population of a part of the menu structure.
Note that automatic resource loading uses the resource base path that is set at construction time and will not work if the resource base path is changed at a later time.
It is also possible to provide the menubar manually using gtk.application.Application.setMenubar.
gtk.application.Application will also automatically setup an icon search path for the default icon theme by appending "icons" to the resource base path. This allows your application to easily store its icons as resources. See gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme.addResourcePath for more information.
If there is a resource located at gtk/help-overlay.ui which defines a gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow with ID help_overlay then gtk.application.Application associates an instance of this shortcuts window with each gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow and sets up the keyboard accelerator <kbd>Control</kbd>+<kbd>?</kbd> to open it. To create a menu item that displays the shortcuts window, associate the item with the action win.show-help-overlay.
A simple application
A simple example is available in the GTK source code repository
gtk.application.Application optionally registers with a session manager of the users session (if you set the gtk.application.Application.registerSession property) and offers various functionality related to the session life-cycle.
An application can block various ways to end the session with the gtk.application.Application.inhibit function. Typical use cases for this kind of inhibiting are long-running, uninterruptible operations, such as burning a CD or performing a disk backup. The session manager may not honor the inhibitor, but it can be expected to inform the user about the negative consequences of ending the session while inhibitors are present.
See Also
HowDoI: Using GtkApplication, Getting Started with GTK: Basics
GApplication parentInstanceGApplicationClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkApplication * application, GtkWindow * window) windowAddedSignal emitted when a [gtk.window.Window] is added to application through [gtk.application.Application.addWindow].void function(GtkApplication * application, GtkWindow * window) windowRemovedSignal emitted when a [gtk.window.Window] is removed from application, either as a side-effect of being destroyed or explicitly through [gtk.application.Application.removeWindow].void *[8] paddinggtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow is a gtk.window.Window subclass that integrates with gtk.application.Application.
Notably, gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow can handle an application menubar.
This class implements the gio.action_group.ActionGroup and gio.action_map.ActionMap interfaces, to let you add window-specific actions that will be exported by the associated gtk.application.Application, together with its application-wide actions. Window-specific actions are prefixed with the “win.” prefix and application-wide actions are prefixed with the “app.” prefix. Actions must be addressed with the prefixed name when referring to them from a gio.menu_model.MenuModel.
Note that widgets that are placed inside a gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow can also activate these actions, if they implement the gtk.actionable.Actionable interface.
The settings gtk.settings.Settings.gtkShellShowsAppMenu and gtk.settings.Settings.gtkShellShowsMenubar tell GTK whether the desktop environment is showing the application menu and menubar models outside the application as part of the desktop shell. For instance, on OS X, both menus will be displayed remotely; on Windows neither will be.
If the desktop environment does not display the menubar, then gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow will automatically show a menubar for it. This behaviour can be overridden with the gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow.showMenubar property. If the desktop environment does not display the application menu, then it will automatically be included in the menubar or in the windows client-side decorations.
See gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu for information about the XML language used by gtk.builder.Builder for menu models.
See also: gtk.application.Application.setMenubar.
A GtkApplicationWindow with a menubar
The code sample below shows how to set up a gtk.application_window.ApplicationWindow with a menu bar defined on the gtk.application.Application:
GtkApplication *app = gtk_application_new ("org.gtk.test", 0);
GtkBuilder *builder = gtk_builder_new_from_string (
"<interface>"
" <menu id='menubar'>"
" <submenu>"
" <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Edit</attribute>"
" <item>"
" <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Copy</attribute>"
" <attribute name='action'>win.copy</attribute>"
" </item>"
" <item>"
" <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Paste</attribute>"
" <attribute name='action'>win.paste</attribute>"
" </item>"
" </submenu>"
" </menu>"
"</interface>",
-1);
GMenuModel *menubar = G_MENU_MODEL (gtk_builder_get_object (builder, "menubar"));
gtk_application_set_menubar (GTK_APPLICATION (app), menubar);
g_object_unref (builder);
// ...
GtkWidget *window = gtk_application_window_new (app);GtkWindow parentInstancegtk.aspect_frame.AspectFrame preserves the aspect ratio of its child.
The frame can respect the aspect ratio of the child widget, or use its own aspect ratio.
CSS nodes
gtk.aspect_frame.AspectFrame uses a CSS node with name frame.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.aspect_frame.AspectFrame used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Starting from GTK 4.12, gtk.aspect_frame.AspectFrame uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Generic role.
gtk.assistant.Assistant is used to represent a complex as a series of steps.
Each step consists of one or more pages. gtk.assistant.Assistant guides the user through the pages, and controls the page flow to collect the data needed for the operation.
gtk.assistant.Assistant handles which buttons to show and to make sensitive based on page sequence knowledge and the gtk.types.AssistantPageType of each page in addition to state information like the completed and committed page statuses.
If you have a case that doesn’t quite fit in gtk.assistant.Assistants way of handling buttons, you can use the gtk.types.AssistantPageType.Custom page type and handle buttons yourself.
gtk.assistant.Assistant maintains a gtk.assistant_page.AssistantPage object for each added child, which holds additional per-child properties. You obtain the gtk.assistant_page.AssistantPage for a child with gtk.assistant.Assistant.getPage.
GtkAssistant as GtkBuildable
The gtk.assistant.Assistant implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface exposes the @action_area as internal children with the name “action_area”.
To add pages to an assistant in gtk.builder.Builder, simply add it as a child to the gtk.assistant.Assistant object. If you need to set per-object properties, create a gtk.assistant_page.AssistantPage object explicitly, and set the child widget as a property on it.
CSS nodes
gtk.assistant.Assistant has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .assistant.
Deprecated
gtk.assistant_page.AssistantPage is an auxiliary object used by `GtkAssistant.
Deprecated
gtk.bin_layout.BinLayout is a gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager subclass useful for create "bins" of widgets.
gtk.bin_layout.BinLayout will stack each child of a widget on top of each other, using the gtk.widget.Widget.hexpand, gtk.widget.Widget.vexpand, gtk.widget.Widget.halign, and gtk.widget.Widget.valign properties of each child to determine where they should be positioned.
GtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassA gtk.bitset.Bitset represents a set of unsigned integers.
Another name for this data structure is "bitmap".
The current implementation is based on roaring bitmaps.
A bitset allows adding a set of integers and provides support for set operations like unions, intersections and checks for equality or if a value is contained in the set. gtk.bitset.Bitset also contains various functions to query metadata about the bitset, such as the minimum or maximum values or its size.
The fastest way to iterate values in a bitset is gtk.bitset_iter.BitsetIter.
The main use case for gtk.bitset.Bitset is implementing complex selections for gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel.
An opaque, stack-allocated struct for iterating over the elements of a gtk.bitset.Bitset.
Before a gtk.bitset_iter.BitsetIter can be used, it needs to be initialized with gtk.bitset_iter.BitsetIter.initFirst, gtk.bitset_iter.BitsetIter.initLast or gtk.bitset_iter.BitsetIter.initAt.
void *[10] privateDatagtk.bookmark_list.BookmarkList is a list model that wraps glib.bookmark_file.BookmarkFile.
It presents a gio.list_model.ListModel and fills it asynchronously with the gio.file_info.FileInfos returned from that function.
The gio.file_info.FileInfos in the list have some attributes in the recent namespace added: recent::private (boolean) and recent:applications (stringv).
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.bool_filter.BoolFilter evaluates a boolean gtk.expression.Expression to determine whether to include items.
GtkFilterClass parentClassA struct that specifies a border around a rectangular area.
Each side can have different width.
short leftThe width of the left bordershort rightThe width of the right bordershort topThe width of the top bordershort bottomThe width of the bottom borderThe gtk.box.Box widget arranges child widgets into a single row or column.
Whether it is a row or column depends on the value of its gtk.orientable.Orientable.orientation property. Within the other dimension, all children are allocated the same size. Of course, the gtk.widget.Widget.halign and gtk.widget.Widget.valign properties can be used on the children to influence their allocation.
Use repeated calls to gtk.box.Box.append to pack widgets into a gtk.box.Box from start to end. Use gtk.box.Box.remove to remove widgets from the gtk.box.Box. gtk.box.Box.insertChildAfter can be used to add a child at a particular position.
Use gtk.box.Box.setHomogeneous to specify whether or not all children of the gtk.box.Box are forced to get the same amount of space.
Use gtk.box.Box.setSpacing to determine how much space will be minimally placed between all children in the gtk.box.Box. Note that spacing is added between the children.
Use gtk.box.Box.reorderChildAfter to move a child to a different place in the box.
CSS nodes
gtk.box.Box uses a single CSS node with name box.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.box.Box used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Starting from GTK 4.12, gtk.box.Box uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Generic role.
GtkWidget parentInstancegtk.box_layout.BoxLayout is a layout manager that arranges children in a single row or column.
Whether it is a row or column depends on the value of its gtk.orientable.Orientable.orientation property. Within the other dimension all children all allocated the same size. The gtk.box_layout.BoxLayout will respect the gtk.widget.Widget.halign and gtk.widget.Widget.valign properties of each child widget.
If you want all children to be assigned the same size, you can use the gtk.box_layout.BoxLayout.homogeneous property.
If you want to specify the amount of space placed between each child, you can use the gtk.box_layout.BoxLayout.spacing property.
GtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassgtk.buildable.Buildable allows objects to extend and customize their deserialization from ui files.
The interface includes methods for setting names and properties of objects, parsing custom tags and constructing child objects.
The gtk.buildable.Buildable interface is implemented by all widgets and many of the non-widget objects that are provided by GTK. The main user of this interface is gtk.builder.Builder. There should be very little need for applications to call any of these functions directly.
An object only needs to implement this interface if it needs to extend the gtk.builder.Builder XML format or run any extra routines at deserialization time.
The gtk.buildable_iface.BuildableIface interface contains methods that are necessary to allow gtk.builder.Builder to construct an object from a gtk.builder.Builder UI definition.
GTypeInterface gIfacethe parent classvoid function(GtkBuildable * buildable, const(char) * id) setIdStores the id attribute given in the [gtk.builder.Builder] UI definition. [gtk.widget.Widget] stores the name as object data. Implement this method if your object has some notion of “ID” and it...const(char) * function(GtkBuildable * buildable) getIdThe getter corresponding to @set_id. Implement this if you implement @set_id.void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * type) addChildAdds a child. The @type parameter can be used to differentiate the kind of child. [gtk.widget.Widget] implements this to add event controllers to the widget, [gtk.notebook.Notebook] uses the @type ...void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * name, const(GValue) * value) setBuildablePropertySets a property of a buildable object. It is normally not necessary to implement this, [gobject.object.ObjectWrap.setProperty] is used by default. [gtk.window.Window] implements this to delay showi...GObject * function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * name) constructChildConstructs a child of a buildable that has been specified as “constructor” in the UI definition. This can be used to reference a widget created in a `<ui>` tag which is outside of the normal Gt...gboolean function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * tagname, GtkBuildableParser * parser, void * * data) customTagStartImplement this if the buildable needs to parse content below `<child>`. To handle an element, the implementation must fill in the @parser and @user_data and return true. [gtk.widget.Widget] impleme...void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * tagname, void * data) customTagEndCalled for the end tag of each custom element that is handled by the buildable (see @custom_tag_start).void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * tagname, void * data) customFinishedCalled for each custom tag handled by the buildable when the builder finishes parsing (see @custom_tag_start)void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder) parserFinishedCalled when a builder finishes the parsing of a UI definition. It is normally not necessary to implement this, unless you need to perform special cleanup actions. [gtk.window.Window] sets the `GtkW...GObject * function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * childname) getInternalChildReturns an internal child of a buildable. [gtk.dialog.Dialog] implements this to give access to its @vbox, making it possible to add children to the vbox in a UI definition. Implement this if the b...An opaque context struct for gtk.types.BuildableParser.
A sub-parser for gtk.buildable.Buildable implementations.
void function(GtkBuildableParseContext * context, const(char) * elementName, const(char *) * attributeNames, const(char *) * attributeValues, void * userData, GError * * _err) startElementfunction called for open elementsvoid function(GtkBuildableParseContext * context, const(char) * elementName, void * userData, GError * * _err) endElementfunction called for close elementsvoid function(GtkBuildableParseContext * context, const(char) * text, size_t textLen, void * userData, GError * * _err) textfunction called for character datavoid function(GtkBuildableParseContext * context, GError * error, void * userData) errorfunction called on errorvoid *[4] paddingA gtk.builder.Builder reads XML descriptions of a user interface and instantiates the described objects.
To create a gtk.builder.Builder from a user interface description, call gtk.builder.Builder.newFromFile, gtk.builder.Builder.newFromResource or gtk.builder.Builder.newFromString.
In the (unusual) case that you want to add user interface descriptions from multiple sources to the same gtk.builder.Builder you can call gtk.builder.Builder.new_ to get an empty builder and populate it by (multiple) calls to gtk.builder.Builder.addFromFile, gtk.builder.Builder.addFromResource or gtk.builder.Builder.addFromString.
A gtk.builder.Builder holds a reference to all objects that it has constructed and drops these references when it is finalized. This finalization can cause the destruction of non-widget objects or widgets which are not contained in a toplevel window. For toplevel windows constructed by a builder, it is the responsibility of the user to call gtk.window.Window.destroy to get rid of them and all the widgets they contain.
The functions gtk.builder.Builder.getObject and gtk.builder.Builder.getObjects can be used to access the widgets in the interface by the names assigned to them inside the UI description. Toplevel windows returned by these functions will stay around until the user explicitly destroys them with gtk.window.Window.destroy. Other widgets will either be part of a larger hierarchy constructed by the builder (in which case you should not have to worry about their lifecycle), or without a parent, in which case they have to be added to some container to make use of them. Non-widget objects need to be reffed with gobject.object.ObjectWrap.ref_ to keep them beyond the lifespan of the builder.
GtkBuilder UI Definitions
gtk.builder.Builder parses textual descriptions of user interfaces which are specified in XML format. We refer to these descriptions as “GtkBuilder UI definitions” or just “UI definitions” if the context is clear.
Structure of UI definitions
UI definition files are always encoded in UTF-8.
The toplevel element is <interface>. It optionally takes a “domain” attribute, which will make the builder look for translated strings using dgettext() in the domain specified. This can also be done by calling gtk.builder.Builder.setTranslationDomain on the builder. For example:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8">
<interface domain="your-app">
...
</interface>Requirements
The target toolkit version(s) are described by <requires> elements, the “lib” attribute specifies the widget library in question (currently the only supported value is “gtk”) and the “version” attribute specifies the target version in the form “<major>.<minor>”. gtk.builder.Builder will error out if the version requirements are not met. For example:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8">
<interface domain="your-app">
<requires lib="gtk" version="4.0" />
</interface>Objects
Objects are defined as children of the <interface> element.
Objects are described by <object> elements, which can contain <property> elements to set properties, <signal> elements which connect signals to handlers, and <child> elements, which describe child objects.
Typically, the specific kind of object represented by an <object> element is specified by the “class” attribute. If the type has not been loaded yet, GTK tries to find the get_type() function from the class name by applying heuristics. This works in most cases, but if necessary, it is possible to specify the name of the get_type() function explicitly with the "type-func" attribute. If your UI definition is referencing internal types, you should make sure to call [gobject.global.typeEnsure] for each object type before parsing the UI definition.
Objects may be given a name with the “id” attribute, which allows the application to retrieve them from the builder with gtk.builder.Builder.getObject. An id is also necessary to use the object as property value in other parts of the UI definition. GTK reserves ids starting and ending with ___ (three consecutive underscores) for its own purposes.
Properties
Setting properties of objects is pretty straightforward with the <property> element: the “name” attribute specifies the name of the property, and the content of the element specifies the value:
<object class="GtkButton">
<property name="label">Hello, world</property>
</object>If the “translatable” attribute is set to a true value, GTK uses gettext() (or dgettext() if the builder has a translation domain set) to find a translation for the value. This happens before the value is parsed, so it can be used for properties of any type, but it is probably most useful for string properties. It is also possible to specify a context to disambiguate short strings, and comments which may help the translators:
<object class="GtkButton">
<property name="label" translatable="yes" context="button">Hello, world</property>
</object>gtk.builder.Builder can parse textual representations for the most common property types:
- characters
- strings
- integers
- floating-point numbers
- booleans (strings like “TRUE”, “t”, “yes”, “y”, “1” are interpreted as true values, strings like “FALSE”, “f”, “no”, “n”, “0” are interpreted as false values)
- enumeration types (can be specified by their full C identifier their short name used when registering the enumeration type, or their integer value)
- flag types (can be specified by their C identifier, short name, integer value, and optionally combined with “|” for bitwise OR, e.g. “GTK_INPUT_HINT_EMOJI|GTK_INPUT_HINT_LOWERCASE”, or “emoji|lowercase”)
- colors (in a format understood by gdk.rgba.RGBA.parse)
- glib.variant.Variant (can be specified in the format understood by glib.variant.Variant.parse)
- pixbufs (can be specified as a filename of an image file to load)
Objects can be referred to by their name and by default refer to objects declared in the local XML fragment and objects exposed via gtk.builder.Builder.exposeObject. In general, gtk.builder.Builder allows forward references to objects declared in the local XML; an object doesn’t have to be constructed before it can be referred to. The exception to this rule is that an object has to be constructed before it can be used as the value of a construct-only property.
Child objects
Many widgets have properties for child widgets, such as gtk.expander.Expander.child. In this case, the preferred way to specify the child widget in a ui file is to simply set the property:
<object class="GtkExpander">
<property name="child">
<object class="GtkLabel">
...
</object>
</property>
</object>Generic containers that can contain an arbitrary number of children, such as gtk.box.Box instead use the <child> element. A <child> element contains an <object> element which describes the child object. Most often, child objects are widgets inside a container, but they can also be, e.g., actions in an action group, or columns in a tree model.
Any object type that implements the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface can specify how children may be added to it. Since many objects and widgets that are included with GTK already implement the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface, typically child objects can be added using the <child> element without having to be concerned about the underlying implementation.
See the [gtk.widget.Widget documentation](class.Widget.html#gtkwidget-as-gtkbuildable) for many examples of using gtk.builder.Builder with widgets, including setting child objects using the <child> element.
A noteworthy special case to the general rule that only objects implementing gtk.buildable.Buildable may specify how to handle the <child> element is that gtk.builder.Builder provides special support for adding objects to a gio.list_store.ListStore by using the <child> element. For instance:
<object class="GListStore">
<property name="item-type">MyObject</property>
<child>
<object class="MyObject" />
</child>
...
</object>Property bindings
It is also possible to bind a property value to another object's property value using the attributes "bind-source" to specify the source object of the binding, and optionally, "bind-property" and "bind-flags" to specify the source property and source binding flags respectively. Internally, gtk.builder.Builder implements this using gobject.binding.Binding objects.
For instance, in the example below the “label” property of the bottom_label widget is bound to the “label” property of the top_button widget:
<object class="GtkBox">
<property name="orientation">vertical</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="top_button">
<property name="label">Hello, world</property>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkLabel" id="bottom_label">
<property name="label"
bind-source="top_button"
bind-property="label"
bind-flags="sync-create" />
</object>
</child>
</object>For more information, see the documentation of the gobject.object.ObjectWrap.bindProperty method.
Please note that another way to set up bindings between objects in .ui files is to use the gtk.expression.Expression methodology. See the [gtk.expression.Expression documentation](class.Expression.html#gtkexpression-in-ui-files) for more information.
Internal children
Sometimes it is necessary to refer to widgets which have implicitly been constructed by GTK as part of a composite widget, to set properties on them or to add further children (e.g. the content area of a gtk.dialog.Dialog). This can be achieved by setting the “internal-child” property of the <child> element to a true value. Note that gtk.builder.Builder still requires an <object> element for the internal child, even if it has already been constructed.
Specialized children
A number of widgets have different places where a child can be added (e.g. tabs vs. page content in notebooks). This can be reflected in a UI definition by specifying the “type” attribute on a <child> The possible values for the “type” attribute are described in the sections describing the widget-specific portions of UI definitions.
Signal handlers and function pointers
Signal handlers are set up with the <signal> element. The “name” attribute specifies the name of the signal, and the “handler” attribute specifies the function to connect to the signal.
<object class="GtkButton" id="hello_button">
<signal name="clicked" handler="hello_button__clicked" />
</object>The remaining attributes, “after”, “swapped” and “object”, have the same meaning as the corresponding parameters of the func@GObject.signal_connect_object or func@GObject.signal_connect_data functions:
- “after” matches the
G_CONNECT_AFTERflag, and will ensure that the handler is called after the default class closure for the signal - “swapped” matches the
G_CONNECT_SWAPPEDflag, and will swap the instance and closure arguments when invoking the signal handler - “object” will bind the signal handler to the lifetime of the object referenced by the attribute
By default "swapped" will be set to "yes" if not specified otherwise, in the case where "object" is set, for convenience. A “last_modification_time” attribute is also allowed, but it does not have a meaning to the builder.
When compiling applications for Windows, you must declare signal callbacks with the G_MODULE_EXPORT decorator, or they will not be put in the symbol table:
G_MODULE_EXPORT void
hello_button__clicked (GtkButton *button,
gpointer data)
{
// ...
}On Linux and Unix, this is not necessary; applications should instead be compiled with the -Wl,--export-dynamic argument inside their compiler flags, and linked against gmodule-export-2.0.
Example UI Definition
<interface>
<object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
<child internal-child="content_area">
<object class="GtkBox">
<child internal-child="action_area">
<object class="GtkBox">
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="ok_button">
<property name="label" translatable="yes">_Ok</property>
<property name="use-underline">True</property>
<signal name="clicked" handler="ok_button_clicked"/>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</interface>Using GtkBuildable for extending UI definitions
Objects can implement the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface to add custom elements and attributes to the XML. Typically, any extension will be documented in each type that implements the interface.
Templates
When describing a gtk.widget.Widget, you can use the <template> tag to describe a UI bound to a specific widget type. GTK will automatically load the UI definition when instantiating the type, and bind children and signal handlers to instance fields and function symbols.
For more information, see the [gtk.widget.Widget documentation](class.Widget.html#building-composite-widgets-from-template-xml) for details.
A gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope implementation for the C language.
gtk.builder_cscope.BuilderCScope instances use symbols explicitly added to @builder with prior calls to gtk.builder_cscope.BuilderCScope.addCallbackSymbol. If developers want to do that, they are encouraged to create their own scopes for that purpose.
In the case that symbols are not explicitly added; GTK will uses gmodule.module_.Module’s introspective features (by opening the module null) to look at the application’s symbol table. From here it tries to match the signal function names given in the interface description with symbols in the application.
Note that unless gtk.builder_cscope.BuilderCScope.addCallbackSymbol is called for all signal callbacks which are referenced by the loaded XML, this functionality will require that gmodule.module_.Module be supported on the platform.
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassgtk.builder_list_item_factory.BuilderListItemFactory is a gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory that creates widgets by instantiating gtk.builder.Builder UI templates.
The templates must be extending gtk.list_item.ListItem, and typically use gtk.expression.Expressions to obtain data from the items in the model.
Example:
<interface>
<template class="GtkListItem">
<property name="child">
<object class="GtkLabel">
<property name="xalign">0</property>
<binding name="label">
<lookup name="name" type="SettingsKey">
<lookup name="item">GtkListItem</lookup>
</lookup>
</binding>
</object>
</property>
</template>
</interface>gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope is an interface to provide language binding support to gtk.builder.Builder.
The goal of gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope is to look up programming-language-specific values for strings that are given in a gtk.builder.Builder UI file.
The primary intended audience is bindings that want to provide deeper integration of gtk.builder.Builder into the language.
A gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope instance may be used with multiple gtk.builder.Builder objects, even at once.
By default, GTK will use its own implementation of gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope for the C language which can be created via gtk.builder_cscope.BuilderCScope.new_.
If you implement gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope for a language binding, you may want to (partially) derive from or fall back to a gtk.builder_cscope.BuilderCScope, as that class implements support for automatic lookups from C symbols.
The virtual function table to implement for gtk.builder_scope.BuilderScope implementations. Default implementations for each function do exist, but they usually just fail, so it is suggested that implementations implement all of them.
GTypeInterface gIfaceGType function(GtkBuilderScope * self, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * typeName) getTypeFromNameTry to lookup a `GType` via the its name. See [gtk.builder.Builder.getTypeFromName] for more details. The C implementation will use [gobject.global.typeFromName] and if that fails try to guess the ...GType function(GtkBuilderScope * self, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * functionName) getTypeFromFunctionTry to lookup a `GType` via the given function name, specified explicitly in a GtkBuilder file, like via the "type-func" attribute in the `<object>` tag. This function is very rarely used. The C im...GClosure * function(GtkBuilderScope * self, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * functionName, GtkBuilderClosureFlags flags, GObject * object, GError * * _err) createClosureCreate a closure with the given arguments. See [gtk.builder.Builder.createClosure] for more details on those. The C implementation will try to use dlsym() to locate the function name and then [gobj...The gtk.button.Button widget is generally used to trigger a callback function that is called when the button is pressed.
The gtk.button.Button widget can hold any valid child widget. That is, it can hold almost any other standard gtk.widget.Widget. The most commonly used child is the gtk.label.Label.
CSS nodes
gtk.button.Button has a single CSS node with name button. The node will get the style classes .image-button or .text-button, if the content is just an image or label, respectively. It may also receive the .flat style class. When activating a button via the keyboard, the button will temporarily gain the .keyboard-activating style class.
Other style classes that are commonly used with gtk.button.Button include .suggested-action and .destructive-action. In special cases, buttons can be made round by adding the .circular style class.
Button-like widgets like gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton, gtk.menu_button.MenuButton, gtk.volume_button.VolumeButton, gtk.lock_button.LockButton, gtk.color_button.ColorButton or gtk.font_button.FontButton use style classes such as .toggle, .popup, .scale, .lock, .color on the button node to differentiate themselves from a plain gtk.button.Button.
Accessibility
gtk.button.Button uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Button role.
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkButton * button) clickedSignal emitted when the button has been activated (pressed and released).void function(GtkButton * button) activateSignal that causes the button to animate press then release. Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the @clicked signal.void *[8] paddingA variant of gtk.closure_expression.ClosureExpression using a C closure.
gtk.calendar.Calendar is a widget that displays a Gregorian calendar, one month at a time.
A gtk.calendar.Calendar can be created with gtk.calendar.Calendar.new_.
The date that is currently displayed can be altered with gtk.calendar.Calendar.selectDay.
To place a visual marker on a particular day, use gtk.calendar.Calendar.markDay and to remove the marker, gtk.calendar.Calendar.unmarkDay. Alternative, all marks can be cleared with gtk.calendar.Calendar.clearMarks.
The selected date can be retrieved from a gtk.calendar.Calendar using gtk.calendar.Calendar.getDate.
Users should be aware that, although the Gregorian calendar is the legal calendar in most countries, it was adopted progressively between 1582 and 1929. Display before these dates is likely to be historically incorrect.
CSS nodes
calendar.view
├── header
│ ├── button
│ ├── stack.month
│ ├── button
│ ├── button
│ ├── label.year
│ ╰── button
╰── grid
╰── label[.day-name][.week-number][.day-number][.other-month][.today]gtk.calendar.Calendar has a main node with name calendar. It contains a subnode called header containing the widgets for switching between years and months.
The grid subnode contains all day labels, including week numbers on the left (marked with the .week-number css class) and day names on top (marked with the .day-name css class).
Day labels that belong to the previous or next month get the .other-month style class. The label of the current day get the .today style class.
Marked day labels get the :selected state assigned.
A gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction that invokes a callback.
An abstract class for laying out gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderers
The gtk.cell_area.CellArea is an abstract class for gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout widgets (also referred to as "layouting widgets") to interface with an arbitrary number of gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderers and interact with the user for a given gtk.tree_model.TreeModel row.
The cell area handles events, focus navigation, drawing and size requests and allocations for a given row of data.
Usually users dont have to interact with the gtk.cell_area.CellArea directly unless they are implementing a cell-layouting widget themselves.
Requesting area sizes
As outlined in GtkWidget’s geometry management section, GTK uses a height-for-width geometry management system to compute the sizes of widgets and user interfaces. gtk.cell_area.CellArea uses the same semantics to calculate the size of an area for an arbitrary number of gtk.tree_model.TreeModel rows.
When requesting the size of a cell area one needs to calculate the size for a handful of rows, and this will be done differently by different layouting widgets. For instance a gtk.tree_view_column.TreeViewColumn always lines up the areas from top to bottom while a gtk.icon_view.IconView on the other hand might enforce that all areas received the same width and wrap the areas around, requesting height for more cell areas when allocated less width.
It’s also important for areas to maintain some cell alignments with areas rendered for adjacent rows (cells can appear “columnized” inside an area even when the size of cells are different in each row). For this reason the gtk.cell_area.CellArea uses a gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext object to store the alignments and sizes along the way (as well as the overall largest minimum and natural size for all the rows which have been calculated with the said context).
The gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext is an opaque object specific to the gtk.cell_area.CellArea which created it (see gtk.cell_area.CellArea.createContext).
The owning cell-layouting widget can create as many contexts as it wishes to calculate sizes of rows which should receive the same size in at least one orientation (horizontally or vertically), However, it’s important that the same gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext which was used to request the sizes for a given gtk.tree_model.TreeModel row be used when rendering or processing events for that row.
In order to request the width of all the rows at the root level of a gtk.tree_model.TreeModel one would do the following:
GtkTreeIter iter;
int minimum_width;
int natural_width;
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
while (valid)
{
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width (area, context, widget, NULL, NULL);
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
}
gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (context, &minimum_width, &natural_width);Note that in this example it’s not important to observe the returned minimum and natural width of the area for each row unless the cell-layouting object is actually interested in the widths of individual rows. The overall width is however stored in the accompanying gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext object and can be consulted at any time.
This can be useful since gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout widgets usually have to support requesting and rendering rows in treemodels with an exceedingly large amount of rows. The gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout widget in that case would calculate the required width of the rows in an idle or timeout source (see func@GLib.timeout_add) and when the widget is requested its actual width in vfunc@Gtk.Widget.measure it can simply consult the width accumulated so far in the gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext object.
A simple example where rows are rendered from top to bottom and take up the full width of the layouting widget would look like:
static void
foo_get_preferred_width (GtkWidget *widget,
int *minimum_size,
int *natural_size)
{
Foo *self = FOO (widget);
FooPrivate *priv = foo_get_instance_private (self);
foo_ensure_at_least_one_handfull_of_rows_have_been_requested (self);
gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (priv->context, minimum_size, natural_size);
}In the above example the Foo widget has to make sure that some row sizes have been calculated (the amount of rows that Foo judged was appropriate to request space for in a single timeout iteration) before simply returning the amount of space required by the area via the gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext.
Requesting the height for width (or width for height) of an area is a similar task except in this case the gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext does not store the data (actually, it does not know how much space the layouting widget plans to allocate it for every row. It’s up to the layouting widget to render each row of data with the appropriate height and width which was requested by the gtk.cell_area.CellArea).
In order to request the height for width of all the rows at the root level of a gtk.tree_model.TreeModel one would do the following:
GtkTreeIter iter;
int minimum_height;
int natural_height;
int full_minimum_height = 0;
int full_natural_height = 0;
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
while (valid)
{
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width (area, context, widget,
width, &minimum_height, &natural_height);
if (width_is_for_allocation)
cache_row_height (&iter, minimum_height, natural_height);
full_minimum_height += minimum_height;
full_natural_height += natural_height;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
}Note that in the above example we would need to cache the heights returned for each row so that we would know what sizes to render the areas for each row. However we would only want to really cache the heights if the request is intended for the layouting widgets real allocation.
In some cases the layouting widget is requested the height for an arbitrary for_width, this is a special case for layouting widgets who need to request size for tens of thousands of rows. For this case it’s only important that the layouting widget calculate one reasonably sized chunk of rows and return that height synchronously. The reasoning here is that any layouting widget is at least capable of synchronously calculating enough height to fill the screen height (or scrolled window height) in response to a single call to vfunc@Gtk.Widget.measure. Returning a perfect height for width that is larger than the screen area is inconsequential since after the layouting receives an allocation from a scrolled window it simply continues to drive the scrollbar values while more and more height is required for the row heights that are calculated in the background.
Rendering Areas
Once area sizes have been acquired at least for the rows in the visible area of the layouting widget they can be rendered at vfunc@Gtk.Widget.snapshot time.
A crude example of how to render all the rows at the root level runs as follows:
GtkAllocation allocation;
GdkRectangle cell_area = { 0, };
GtkTreeIter iter;
int minimum_width;
int natural_width;
gtk_widget_get_allocation (widget, &allocation);
cell_area.width = allocation.width;
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
while (valid)
{
cell_area.height = get_cached_height_for_row (&iter);
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
gtk_cell_area_render (area, context, widget, cr,
&cell_area, &cell_area, state_flags, FALSE);
cell_area.y += cell_area.height;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
}Note that the cached height in this example really depends on how the layouting widget works. The layouting widget might decide to give every row its minimum or natural height or, if the model content is expected to fit inside the layouting widget without scrolling, it would make sense to calculate the allocation for each row at the time the widget is allocated using func@Gtk.distribute_natural_allocation.
Handling Events and Driving Keyboard Focus
Passing events to the area is as simple as handling events on any normal widget and then passing them to the gtk.cell_area.CellArea.event API as they come in. Usually gtk.cell_area.CellArea is only interested in button events, however some customized derived areas can be implemented who are interested in handling other events. Handling an event can trigger the gtk.cell_area.CellArea.focusChanged signal to fire; as well as gtk.cell_area.CellArea.addEditable in the case that an editable cell was clicked and needs to start editing. You can call gtk.cell_area.CellArea.stopEditing at any time to cancel any cell editing that is currently in progress.
The gtk.cell_area.CellArea drives keyboard focus from cell to cell in a way similar to gtk.widget.Widget. For layouting widgets that support giving focus to cells it’s important to remember to pass gtk.types.CellRendererState.Focused to the area functions for the row that has focus and to tell the area to paint the focus at render time.
Layouting widgets that accept focus on cells should implement the vfunc@Gtk.Widget.focus virtual method. The layouting widget is always responsible for knowing where gtk.tree_model.TreeModel rows are rendered inside the widget, so at vfunc@Gtk.Widget.focus time the layouting widget should use the gtk.cell_area.CellArea methods to navigate focus inside the area and then observe the gtk.types.DirectionType to pass the focus to adjacent rows and areas.
A basic example of how the vfunc@Gtk.Widget.focus virtual method should be implemented:
static gboolean
foo_focus (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkDirectionType direction)
{
Foo *self = FOO (widget);
FooPrivate *priv = foo_get_instance_private (self);
int focus_row = priv->focus_row;
gboolean have_focus = FALSE;
if (!gtk_widget_has_focus (widget))
gtk_widget_grab_focus (widget);
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, priv->focus_row);
while (valid)
{
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (priv->area, priv->model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
if (gtk_cell_area_focus (priv->area, direction))
{
priv->focus_row = focus_row;
have_focus = TRUE;
break;
}
else
{
if (direction == GTK_DIR_RIGHT ||
direction == GTK_DIR_LEFT)
break;
else if (direction == GTK_DIR_UP ||
direction == GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD)
{
if (focus_row == 0)
break;
else
{
focus_row--;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, focus_row);
}
}
else
{
if (focus_row == last_row)
break;
else
{
focus_row++;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (priv->model, &iter);
}
}
}
}
return have_focus;
}Note that the layouting widget is responsible for matching the gtk.types.DirectionType values to the way it lays out its cells.
Cell Properties
The gtk.cell_area.CellArea introduces cell properties for gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderers. This provides some general interfaces for defining the relationship cell areas have with their cells. For instance in a gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox a cell might “expand” and receive extra space when the area is allocated more than its full natural request, or a cell might be configured to “align” with adjacent rows which were requested and rendered with the same gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext.
Use gtk.cell_area_class.CellAreaClass.installCellProperty to install cell properties for a cell area class and gtk.cell_area_class.CellAreaClass.findCellProperty or gtk.cell_area_class.CellAreaClass.listCellProperties to get information about existing cell properties.
To set the value of a cell property, use gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSetProperty, gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSet or gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSetValist. To obtain the value of a cell property, use gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellGetProperty gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellGet or gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellGetValist.
Deprecated
contents
GInitiallyUnowned parentInstanceA cell area that renders GtkCellRenderers into a row or a column
The gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox renders cell renderers into a row or a column depending on its gtk.types.Orientation.
GtkCellAreaBox uses a notion of packing. Packing refers to adding cell renderers with reference to a particular position in a gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox. There are two reference positions: the start and the end of the box. When the gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox is oriented in the gtk.types.Orientation.Vertical orientation, the start is defined as the top of the box and the end is defined as the bottom. In the gtk.types.Orientation.Horizontal orientation start is defined as the left side and the end is defined as the right side.
Alignments of gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderers rendered in adjacent rows can be configured by configuring the gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox align child cell property with gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSetProperty or by specifying the "align" argument to gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox.packStart and gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox.packEnd.
Deprecated
contents
GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer) addadds a [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer] to the area.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer) removeremoves a [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer] from the area.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellCallback callback, void * callbackData) foreach_calls the [gtk.types.CellCallback] function on every [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer] in the area with the provided user data until the callback returns true.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, GtkCellAllocCallback callback, void * callbackData) foreachAllocCalls the [gtk.types.CellAllocCallback] function on every [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer] in the area with the allocated area for the cell and the provided user data until the callback returns true.int function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, GdkEvent * event, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) eventHandle an event in the area, this is generally used to activate a cell at the event location for button events but can also be used to generically pass events to [gtk.widget.Widget]s drawn onto the...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, GtkSnapshot * snapshot, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags, gboolean paintFocus) snapshotActually snapshot the area’s cells to the specified rectangle, @background_area should be correctly distributed to the cells corresponding background areas.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, gboolean isExpander, gboolean isExpanded) applyAttributesApply the cell attributes to the cells. This is implemented as a signal and generally [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] subclasses don't need to implement it since it is handled by the base class.GtkCellAreaContext * function(GtkCellArea * area) createContextCreates and returns a class specific [gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext] to store cell alignment and allocation details for a said [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] class.GtkCellAreaContext * function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context) copyContextCreates a new [gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext] in the same state as the passed @context with any cell alignment data and allocations intact.GtkSizeRequestMode function(GtkCellArea * area) getRequestModeThis allows an area to tell its layouting widget whether it prefers to be allocated in [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth] or [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.WidthForHeight] mode.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthCalculates the minimum and natural width of the areas cells with the current attributes applied while considering the particular layouting details of the said [gtk.cell_area.CellArea]. While reques...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightForWidthCalculates the minimum and natural height for the area if the passed @context would be allocated the given width. When implementing this virtual method it is safe to assume that @context has alread...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightCalculates the minimum and natural height of the areas cells with the current attributes applied. Essentially this is the same as `GtkCellAreaClass.get_preferred_width()` only for areas that are be...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int height, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthForHeightCalculates the minimum and natural width for the area if the passed @context would be allocated the given height. The same as `GtkCellAreaClass.get_preferred_height_for_width()` only for handling r...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer, uint propertyId, const(GValue) * value, GParamSpec * pspec) setCellPropertyThis should be implemented to handle changes in child cell properties for a given [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer] that were previously installed on the [gtk.cell_area_class.CellAreaClass] with [gt...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer, uint propertyId, GValue * value, GParamSpec * pspec) getCellPropertyThis should be implemented to report the values of child cell properties for a given child [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer].gboolean function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkDirectionType direction) focusThis virtual method should be implemented to navigate focus from cell to cell inside the [gtk.cell_area.CellArea]. The [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] should move focus from cell to cell inside the area a...gboolean function(GtkCellArea * area) isActivatableReturns whether the [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] can respond to `GtkCellAreaClass.activate()`, usually this does not need to be implemented since the base class takes care of this however it can be enh...gboolean function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags, gboolean editOnly) activateThis is called when the layouting widget rendering the [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] activates the focus cell (see [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.getFocusCell]).void *[8] paddingStores geometrical information for a series of rows in a GtkCellArea
The gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext object is created by a given gtk.cell_area.CellArea implementation via its GtkCellAreaClass.create_context() virtual method and is used to store cell sizes and alignments for a series of gtk.tree_model.TreeModel rows that are requested and rendered in the same context.
gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout widgets can create any number of contexts in which to request and render groups of data rows. However, it’s important that the same context which was used to request sizes for a given gtk.tree_model.TreeModel row also be used for the same row when calling other gtk.cell_area.CellArea APIs such as gtk.cell_area.CellArea.render and gtk.cell_area.CellArea.event.
Deprecated
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellAreaContext * context, int width, int height) allocateThis tells the context that an allocation width or height (or both) have been decided for a group of rows. The context should store any allocations for internally aligned cells at this point so tha...void function(GtkCellAreaContext * context) resetClear any previously stored information about requested and allocated sizes for the context.void function(GtkCellAreaContext * context, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightForWidthReturns the aligned height for the given width that context must store while collecting sizes for it’s rows.void function(GtkCellAreaContext * context, int height, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthForHeightReturns the aligned width for the given height that context must store while collecting sizes for it’s rows.void *[8] paddingInterface for widgets that can be used for editing cells
The gtk.cell_editable.CellEditable interface must be implemented for widgets to be usable to edit the contents of a gtk.tree_view.TreeView cell. It provides a way to specify how temporary widgets should be configured for editing, get the new value, etc.
Deprecated
contents. See gtk.editable.Editable for editable text widgets
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkCellEditable * cellEditable) editingDoneSignal is a sign for the cell renderer to update its value from the cell_editable.void function(GtkCellEditable * cellEditable) removeWidgetSignal is meant to indicate that the cell is finished editing, and the widget may now be destroyed.void function(GtkCellEditable * cellEditable, GdkEvent * event) startEditingBegins editing on a cell_editable.An interface for packing cells
gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout is an interface to be implemented by all objects which want to provide a gtk.tree_view_column.TreeViewColumn like API for packing cells, setting attributes and data funcs.
One of the notable features provided by implementations of gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout are attributes. Attributes let you set the properties in flexible ways. They can just be set to constant values like regular properties. But they can also be mapped to a column of the underlying tree model with gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout.setAttributes, which means that the value of the attribute can change from cell to cell as they are rendered by the cell renderer. Finally, it is possible to specify a function with gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout.setCellDataFunc that is called to determine the value of the attribute for each cell that is rendered.
GtkCellLayouts as GtkBuildable
Implementations of GtkCellLayout which also implement the GtkBuildable interface (gtk.cell_view.CellView, gtk.icon_view.IconView, gtk.combo_box.ComboBox, gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion, gtk.tree_view_column.TreeViewColumn) accept gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer objects as <child> elements in UI definitions. They support a custom <attributes> element for their children, which can contain multiple <attribute> elements. Each <attribute> element has a name attribute which specifies a property of the cell renderer; the content of the element is the attribute value.
This is an example of a UI definition fragment specifying attributes:
<object class="GtkCellView">
<child>
<object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
<attributes>
<attribute name="text">0</attribute>
</attributes>
</child>
</object>Furthermore for implementations of gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout that use a gtk.cell_area.CellArea to lay out cells (all gtk.cell_layout.CellLayouts in GTK use a gtk.cell_area.CellArea) cell properties can also be defined in the format by specifying the custom <cell-packing> attribute which can contain multiple <property> elements.
Here is a UI definition fragment specifying cell properties:
<object class="GtkTreeViewColumn">
<child>
<object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
<cell-packing>
<property name="align">True</property>
<property name="expand">False</property>
</cell-packing>
</child>
</object>Subclassing GtkCellLayout implementations
When subclassing a widget that implements gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout like gtk.icon_view.IconView or gtk.combo_box.ComboBox, there are some considerations related to the fact that these widgets internally use a gtk.cell_area.CellArea. The cell area is exposed as a construct-only property by these widgets. This means that it is possible to e.g. do
GtkWIdget *combo =
g_object_new (GTK_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", my_cell_area, NULL);to use a custom cell area with a combo box. But construct properties are only initialized after instance init() functions have run, which means that using functions which rely on the existence of the cell area in your subclass init() function will cause the default cell area to be instantiated. In this case, a provided construct property value will be ignored (with a warning, to alert you to the problem).
static void
my_combo_box_init (MyComboBox *b)
{
GtkCellRenderer *cell;
cell = gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new ();
// The following call causes the default cell area for combo boxes,
// a GtkCellAreaBox, to be instantiated
gtk_cell_layout_pack_start (GTK_CELL_LAYOUT (b), cell, FALSE);
...
}
GtkWidget *
my_combo_box_new (GtkCellArea *area)
{
// This call is going to cause a warning about area being ignored
return g_object_new (MY_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", area, NULL);
}If supporting alternative cell areas with your derived widget is not important, then this does not have to concern you. If you want to support alternative cell areas, you can do so by moving the problematic calls out of init() and into a constructor() for your class.
Deprecated
See gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager for layout manager delegate objects
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, gboolean expand) packStartPacks the cell into the beginning of cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, gboolean expand) packEndAdds the cell to the end of cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout) clearUnsets all the mappings on all renderers on cell_layout and removes all renderers from cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, const(char) * attribute, int column) addAttributeAdds an attribute mapping to the list in cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkCellLayoutDataFunc func, void * funcData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setCellDataFuncSets the [gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout]DataFunc to use for cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell) clearAttributesClears all existing attributes previously set with [gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout.setAttributes].void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, int position) reorderRe-inserts cell at position.GList * function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout) getCellsGet the cell renderers which have been added to cell_layout.GtkCellArea * function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout) getAreaGet the underlying [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] which might be cell_layout if called on a [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] or might be NULL if no [gtk.cell_area.CellArea] is used by cell_layout.An object for rendering a single cell
The gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer is a base class of a set of objects used for rendering a cell to a cairo.context.Context. These objects are used primarily by the gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget, though they aren’t tied to them in any specific way. It is worth noting that gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer is not a gtk.widget.Widget and cannot be treated as such.
The primary use of a gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer is for drawing a certain graphical elements on a cairo.context.Context. Typically, one cell renderer is used to draw many cells on the screen. To this extent, it isn’t expected that a CellRenderer keep any permanent state around. Instead, any state is set just prior to use using gobject.object.ObjectWraps property system. Then, the cell is measured using gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer.getPreferredSize. Finally, the cell is rendered in the correct location using gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer.snapshot.
There are a number of rules that must be followed when writing a new gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer. First and foremost, it’s important that a certain set of properties will always yield a cell renderer of the same size, barring a style change. The gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer also has a number of generic properties that are expected to be honored by all children.
Beyond merely rendering a cell, cell renderers can optionally provide active user interface elements. A cell renderer can be “activatable” like gtk.cell_renderer.CellRendererToggle, which toggles when it gets activated by a mouse click, or it can be “editable” like gtk.cell_renderer.CellRendererText, which allows the user to edit the text using a widget implementing the gtk.cell_editable.CellEditable interface, e.g. gtk.entry.Entry. To make a cell renderer activatable or editable, you have to implement the gtk.cell_renderer.CellRendererClass.activate or gtk.cell_renderer.CellRendererClass.start_editing virtual functions, respectively.
Many properties of gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer and its subclasses have a corresponding “set” property, e.g. “cell-background-set” corresponds to “cell-background”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not. You should not set them independently.
Deprecated
contents
Renders a keyboard accelerator in a cell
gtk.cell_renderer_accel.CellRendererAccel displays a keyboard accelerator (i.e. a key combination like Control + a). If the cell renderer is editable, the accelerator can be changed by simply typing the new combination.
Deprecated
provide their own implementation according to platform design guidelines
GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassGtkSizeRequestMode function(GtkCellRenderer * cell) getRequestModeCalled to gets whether the cell renderer prefers a height-for-width layout or a width-for-height layout.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumSize, int * naturalSize) getPreferredWidthCalled to get a renderer’s natural width.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightForWidthCalled to get a renderer’s natural height for width.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumSize, int * naturalSize) getPreferredHeightCalled to get a renderer’s natural height.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int height, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthForHeightCalled to get a renderer’s natural width for height.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, GtkCellRendererState flags, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GdkRectangle * alignedArea) getAlignedAreaCalled to get the aligned area used by @cell inside @cell_area.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkSnapshot * snapshot, GtkWidget * widget, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) snapshotCalled to snapshot the content of the [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer].gboolean function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GdkEvent * event, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * path, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) activateCalled to activate the content of the [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer].GtkCellEditable * function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GdkEvent * event, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * path, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) startEditingCalled to initiate editing the content of the [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer].void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell) editingCanceledSignal gets emitted when the user cancels the process of editing a cell.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkCellEditable * editable, const(char) * path) editingStartedSignal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.void *[8] paddingRenders a combobox in a cell
gtk.cell_renderer_combo.CellRendererCombo renders text in a cell like gtk.cell_renderer_text.CellRendererText from which it is derived. But while gtk.cell_renderer_text.CellRendererText offers a simple entry to edit the text, gtk.cell_renderer_combo.CellRendererCombo offers a gtk.combo_box.ComboBox widget to edit the text. The values to display in the combo box are taken from the tree model specified in the gtk.cell_renderer_combo.CellRendererCombo:model property.
The combo cell renderer takes care of adding a text cell renderer to the combo box and sets it to display the column specified by its can be set in a handler for the GtkCellRenderer::editing-started signal.
Deprecated
should use gtk.drop_down.DropDown instead
Renders a pixbuf in a cell
A gtk.cell_renderer_pixbuf.CellRendererPixbuf can be used to render an image in a cell. It allows to render either a given gdkpixbuf.pixbuf.Pixbuf (set via the GtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf property) or a named icon (set via the GtkCellRendererPixbuf:icon-name property).
To support the tree view, gtk.cell_renderer_pixbuf.CellRendererPixbuf also supports rendering two alternative pixbufs, when the GtkCellRenderer:is-expander property is true. If the GtkCellRenderer:is-expanded property is true and the GtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-open property is set to a pixbuf, it renders that pixbuf, if the GtkCellRenderer:is-expanded property is false and the GtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-closed property is set to a pixbuf, it renders that one.
Deprecated
should use gtk.image.Image for icons, and gtk.picture.Picture for images
Renders numbers as progress bars
gtk.cell_renderer_progress.CellRendererProgress renders a numeric value as a progress par in a cell. Additionally, it can display a text on top of the progress bar.
Deprecated
You should use gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar instead
Renders a spin button in a cell
gtk.cell_renderer_spin.CellRendererSpin renders text in a cell like gtk.cell_renderer_text.CellRendererText from which it is derived. But while gtk.cell_renderer_text.CellRendererText offers a simple entry to edit the text, gtk.cell_renderer_spin.CellRendererSpin offers a gtk.spin_button.SpinButton widget. Of course, that means that the text has to be parseable as a floating point number.
The range of the spinbutton is taken from the adjustment property of the cell renderer, which can be set explicitly or mapped to a column in the tree model, like all properties of cell renders. gtk.cell_renderer_spin.CellRendererSpin also has properties for the GtkCellRendererSpin:climb-rate and the number of GtkCellRendererSpin:digits to display. Other gtk.spin_button.SpinButton properties can be set in a handler for the GtkCellRenderer::editing-started signal.
Deprecated
You should use gtk.spin_button.SpinButton instead
Renders a spinning animation in a cell
gtk.cell_renderer_spinner.CellRendererSpinner renders a spinning animation in a cell, very similar to gtk.spinner.Spinner. It can often be used as an alternative to a gtk.cell_renderer_progress.CellRendererProgress for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.
To start the animation in a cell, set the GtkCellRendererSpinner:active property to true and increment the GtkCellRendererSpinner:pulse property at regular intervals. The usual way to set the cell renderer properties for each cell is to bind them to columns in your tree model using e.g. gtk.tree_view_column.TreeViewColumn.addAttribute.
Deprecated
You should use gtk.spinner.Spinner instead
Renders text in a cell
A gtk.cell_renderer_text.CellRendererText renders a given text in its cell, using the font, color and style information provided by its properties. The text will be ellipsized if it is too long and the GtkCellRendererText:ellipsize property allows it.
If the GtkCellRenderer:mode is gtk.types.CellRendererMode.Editable, the gtk.cell_renderer_text.CellRendererText allows to edit its text using an entry.
Deprecated
You should use gtk.inscription.Inscription or gtk.label.Label instead
GtkCellRenderer parentGtkCellRendererClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellRendererText * cellRendererText, const(char) * path, const(char) * newText) editedvoid *[8] paddingRenders a toggle button in a cell
gtk.cell_renderer_toggle.CellRendererToggle renders a toggle button in a cell. The button is drawn as a radio or a checkbutton, depending on the GtkCellRendererToggle:radio property. When activated, it emits the GtkCellRendererToggle::toggled signal.
Deprecated
You should use gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton instead
A widget displaying a single row of a GtkTreeModel
A gtk.cell_view.CellView displays a single row of a gtk.tree_model.TreeModel using a gtk.cell_area.CellArea and gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext. A gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext can be provided to the gtk.cell_view.CellView at construction time in order to keep the cellview in context of a group of cell views, this ensures that the renderers displayed will be properly aligned with each other (like the aligned cells in the menus of gtk.combo_box.ComboBox).
gtk.cell_view.CellView is gtk.orientable.Orientable in order to decide in which orientation the underlying gtk.cell_area_context.CellAreaContext should be allocated. Taking the gtk.combo_box.ComboBox menu as an example, cellviews should be oriented horizontally if the menus are listed top-to-bottom and thus all share the same width but may have separate individual heights (left-to-right menus should be allocated vertically since they all share the same height but may have variable widths).
CSS nodes
GtkCellView has a single CSS node with name cellview.
Deprecated
You can use gtk.box.Box instead
gtk.center_box.CenterBox arranges three children in a row, keeping the middle child centered as well as possible.
To add children to gtk.center_box.CenterBox, use gtk.center_box.CenterBox.setStartWidget, gtk.center_box.CenterBox.setCenterWidget and gtk.center_box.CenterBox.setEndWidget.
The sizing and positioning of children can be influenced with the align and expand properties of the children.
GtkCenterBox as GtkBuildable
The gtk.center_box.CenterBox implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports placing children in the 3 positions by specifying “start”, “center” or “end” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
CSS nodes
gtk.center_box.CenterBox uses a single CSS node with the name “box”,
The first child of the gtk.center_box.CenterBox will be allocated depending on the text direction, i.e. in left-to-right layouts it will be allocated on the left and in right-to-left layouts on the right.
In vertical orientation, the nodes of the children are arranged from top to bottom.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.center_box.CenterBox used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Starting from GTK 4.12, gtk.center_box.CenterBox uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Generic role.
gtk.center_layout.CenterLayout is a layout manager that manages up to three children.
The start widget is allocated at the start of the layout (left in left-to-right locales and right in right-to-left ones), and the end widget at the end.
The center widget is centered regarding the full width of the layout's.
GtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassA gtk.check_button.CheckButton places a label next to an indicator.
A gtk.check_button.CheckButton is created by calling either gtk.check_button.CheckButton.new_ or gtk.check_button.CheckButton.newWithLabel.
The state of a gtk.check_button.CheckButton can be set specifically using gtk.check_button.CheckButton.setActive, and retrieved using gtk.check_button.CheckButton.getActive.
Inconsistent state
In addition to "on" and "off", check buttons can be an "in between" state that is neither on nor off. This can be used e.g. when the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a check button, and the current values in that range are inconsistent.
To set a gtk.check_button.CheckButton to inconsistent state, use gtk.check_button.CheckButton.setInconsistent.
Grouping
Check buttons can be grouped together, to form mutually exclusive groups - only one of the buttons can be toggled at a time, and toggling another one will switch the currently toggled one off.
Grouped check buttons use a different indicator, and are commonly referred to as radio buttons.
To add a gtk.check_button.CheckButton to a group, use gtk.check_button.CheckButton.setGroup.
When the code must keep track of the state of a group of radio buttons, it is recommended to keep track of such state through a stateful gio.action.Action with a target for each button. Using the toggled signals to keep track of the group changes and state is discouraged.
CSS nodes
checkbutton[.text-button]
├── check
╰── [label]A gtk.check_button.CheckButton has a main node with name checkbutton. If the gtk.check_button.CheckButton.label or gtk.check_button.CheckButton.child properties are set, it contains a child widget. The indicator node is named check when no group is set, and radio if the checkbutton is grouped together with other checkbuttons.
Accessibility
gtk.check_button.CheckButton uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Checkbox role.
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCheckButton * checkButton) toggledvoid function(GtkCheckButton * checkButton) activatevoid *[7] paddingAn expression using a custom gobject.closure.Closure to compute the value from its parameters.
The gtk.color_button.ColorButton allows to open a color chooser dialog to change the color.
It is suitable widget for selecting a color in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
colorbutton
╰── button.color
╰── [content]gtk.color_button.ColorButton has a single CSS node with name colorbutton which contains a button node. To differentiate it from a plain gtk.button.Button, it gets the .color style class.
Deprecated
gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser is an interface that is implemented by widgets for choosing colors.
Depending on the situation, colors may be allowed to have alpha (translucency).
In GTK, the main widgets that implement this interface are gtk.color_chooser_widget.ColorChooserWidget, gtk.color_chooser_dialog.ColorChooserDialog and gtk.color_button.ColorButton.
Deprecated
instead of widgets implementing gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser
A dialog for choosing a color.
!An example GtkColorChooserDialog
gtk.color_chooser_dialog.ColorChooserDialog implements the gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser interface and does not provide much API of its own.
To create a gtk.color_chooser_dialog.ColorChooserDialog, use gtk.color_chooser_dialog.ColorChooserDialog.new_.
To change the initially selected color, use gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser.setRgba. To get the selected color use gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser.getRgba.
gtk.color_chooser_dialog.ColorChooserDialog has been deprecated in favor of gtk.color_dialog.ColorDialog.
CSS nodes
gtk.color_chooser_dialog.ColorChooserDialog has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .colorchooser.
Deprecated
GTypeInterface baseInterfacevoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, GdkRGBA * color) getRgbavoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, const(GdkRGBA) * color) setRgbavoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, GtkOrientation orientation, int colorsPerLine, int nColors, GdkRGBA * colors) addPalettevoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, const(GdkRGBA) * color) colorActivatedvoid *[12] paddingThe gtk.color_chooser_widget.ColorChooserWidget widget lets the user select a color.
By default, the chooser presents a predefined palette of colors, plus a small number of settable custom colors. It is also possible to select a different color with the single-color editor.
To enter the single-color editing mode, use the context menu of any color of the palette, or use the '+' button to add a new custom color.
The chooser automatically remembers the last selection, as well as custom colors.
To create a gtk.color_chooser_widget.ColorChooserWidget, use gtk.color_chooser_widget.ColorChooserWidget.new_.
To change the initially selected color, use gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser.setRgba. To get the selected color use gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser.getRgba.
The gtk.color_chooser_widget.ColorChooserWidget is used in the gtk.color_chooser_dialog.ColorChooserDialog to provide a dialog for selecting colors.
CSS names
gtk.color_chooser_widget.ColorChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name colorchooser.
Deprecated
A gtk.color_dialog.ColorDialog object collects the arguments that are needed to present a color chooser dialog to the user, such as a title for the dialog and whether it should be modal.
The dialog is shown with the gtk.color_dialog.ColorDialog.chooseRgba function. This API follows the GIO async pattern, and the result can be obtained by calling gtk.color_dialog.ColorDialog.chooseRgbaFinish.
See gtk.color_dialog_button.ColorDialogButton for a convenient control that uses gtk.color_dialog.ColorDialog and presents the results.
The gtk.color_dialog_button.ColorDialogButton is a wrapped around a gtk.color_dialog.ColorDialog and allows to open a color chooser dialog to change the color.
!An example GtkColorDialogButton
It is suitable widget for selecting a color in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
colorbutton
╰── button.color
╰── [content]gtk.color_dialog_button.ColorDialogButton has a single CSS node with name colorbutton which contains a button node. To differentiate it from a plain gtk.button.Button, it gets the .color style class.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassGObjectClass parentClassgtk.column_view.ColumnView presents a large dynamic list of items using multiple columns with headers.
gtk.column_view.ColumnView uses the factories of its columns to generate a cell widget for each column, for each visible item and displays them together as the row for this item.
The gtk.column_view.ColumnView.showRowSeparators and gtk.column_view.ColumnView.showColumnSeparators properties offer a simple way to display separators between the rows or columns.
gtk.column_view.ColumnView allows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on rubberband selection, using gtk.column_view.ColumnView.enableRubberband.
The column view supports sorting that can be customized by the user by clicking on column headers. To set this up, the gtk.sorter.Sorter returned by gtk.column_view.ColumnView.getSorter must be attached to a sort model for the data that the view is showing, and the columns must have sorters attached to them by calling gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn.setSorter. The initial sort order can be set with gtk.column_view.ColumnView.sortByColumn.
The column view also supports interactive resizing and reordering of columns, via Drag-and-Drop of the column headers. This can be enabled or disabled with the gtk.column_view.ColumnView.reorderable and gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn.resizable properties.
To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview.
CSS nodes
columnview[.column-separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar][.data-table]
├── header
│ ├── <column header>
┊ ┊
│ ╰── <column header>
│
├── listview
│
┊
╰── [rubberband]gtk.column_view.ColumnView uses a single CSS node named columnview. It may carry the .column-separators style class, when gtk.column_view.ColumnView.showColumnSeparators property is set. Header widgets appear below a node with name header. The rows are contained in a gtk.list_view.ListView widget, so there is a listview node with the same structure as for a standalone gtk.list_view.ListView widget. If gtk.column_view.ColumnView.showRowSeparators is set, it will be passed on to the list view, causing its CSS node to carry the .separators style class. For rubberband selection, a node with name rubberband is used.
The main columnview node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation: .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.
Accessibility
gtk.column_view.ColumnView uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TreeGrid role, header title widgets are using the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ColumnHeader role. The row widgets are using the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Row role, and individual cells are using the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.GridCell role
gtk.column_view_cell.ColumnViewCell is used by gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn to represent items in a cell in gtk.column_view.ColumnView.
The gtk.column_view_cell.ColumnViewCells are managed by the columnview widget (with its factory) and cannot be created by applications, but they need to be populated by application code. This is done by calling gtk.column_view_cell.ColumnViewCell.setChild.
gtk.column_view_cell.ColumnViewCells exist in 2 stages:
- The unbound stage where the listitem is not currently connected to an item in the list. In that case, the gtk.column_view_cell.ColumnViewCell.item property is set to null.
- The bound stage where the listitem references an item from the list. The gtk.column_view_cell.ColumnViewCell.item property is not null.
gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn represents the columns being added to a gtk.column_view.ColumnView.
The main ingredient for a gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn is the gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory that tells the columnview how to create cells for this column from items in the model.
Columns have a title, and can optionally have a header menu set with gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn.setHeaderMenu.
A sorter can be associated with a column using gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn.setSorter, to let users influence sorting by clicking on the column header.
gtk.column_view_row.ColumnViewRow is used by gtk.column_view.ColumnView to allow configuring how rows are displayed.
It is not used to set the widgets displayed in the individual cells. For that see method@GtkColumnViewColumn.set_factory and class@GtkColumnViewCell.
gtk.column_view_sorter.ColumnViewSorter is a sorter implementation that is geared towards the needs of gtk.column_view.ColumnView.
The sorter returned by gtk.column_view.ColumnView.getSorter is a gtk.column_view_sorter.ColumnViewSorter.
In column views, sorting can be configured by associating sorters with columns, and users can invert sort order by clicking on column headers. The API of gtk.column_view_sorter.ColumnViewSorter is designed to allow saving and restoring this configuration.
If you are only interested in the primary sort column (i.e. the column where a sort indicator is shown in the header), then you can just look at gtk.column_view_sorter.ColumnViewSorter.primarySortColumn and gtk.column_view_sorter.ColumnViewSorter.primarySortOrder.
If you want to store the full sort configuration, including secondary sort columns that are used for tie breaking, then you can use gtk.column_view_sorter.ColumnViewSorter.getNthSortColumn. To get notified about changes, use gtk.sorter.Sorter.changed.
To restore a saved sort configuration on a gtk.column_view.ColumnView, use code like:
sorter = gtk_column_view_get_sorter (view);
for (i = gtk_column_view_sorter_get_n_sort_columns (sorter) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
{
column = gtk_column_view_sorter_get_nth_sort_column (sorter, i, &order);
gtk_column_view_sort_by_column (view, column, order);
}GtkSorterClass parentClassA gtk.combo_box.ComboBox is a widget that allows the user to choose from a list of valid choices.
The gtk.combo_box.ComboBox displays the selected choice; when activated, the gtk.combo_box.ComboBox displays a popup which allows the user to make a new choice.
The gtk.combo_box.ComboBox uses the model-view pattern; the list of valid choices is specified in the form of a tree model, and the display of the choices can be adapted to the data in the model by using cell renderers, as you would in a tree view. This is possible since gtk.combo_box.ComboBox implements the gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout interface. The tree model holding the valid choices is not restricted to a flat list, it can be a real tree, and the popup will reflect the tree structure.
To allow the user to enter values not in the model, the gtk.combo_box.ComboBox.hasEntry property allows the gtk.combo_box.ComboBox to contain a gtk.entry.Entry. This entry can be accessed by calling gtk.combo_box.ComboBox.getChild on the combo box.
For a simple list of textual choices, the model-view API of gtk.combo_box.ComboBox can be a bit overwhelming. In this case, gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText offers a simple alternative. Both gtk.combo_box.ComboBox and gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText can contain an entry.
CSS nodes
combobox
├── box.linked
│ ╰── button.combo
│ ╰── box
│ ├── cellview
│ ╰── arrow
╰── window.popupA normal combobox contains a box with the .linked class, a button with the .combo class and inside those buttons, there are a cellview and an arrow.
combobox
├── box.linked
│ ├── entry.combo
│ ╰── button.combo
│ ╰── box
│ ╰── arrow
╰── window.popupA gtk.combo_box.ComboBox with an entry has a single CSS node with name combobox. It contains a box with the .linked class. That box contains an entry and a button, both with the .combo class added. The button also contains another node with name arrow.
Accessibility
gtk.combo_box.ComboBox uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ComboBox role.
Deprecated
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkComboBox * comboBox) changedSignal is emitted when the active item is changed.char * function(GtkComboBox * comboBox, const(char) * path) formatEntryTextSignal which allows you to change how the text displayed in a combo box’s entry is displayed.void function(GtkComboBox * comboBox) activatevoid *[7] paddingA gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText is a simple variant of gtk.combo_box.ComboBox for text-only use cases.
gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText hides the model-view complexity of gtk.combo_box.ComboBox.
To create a gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText, use gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.new_ or gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.newWithEntry.
You can add items to a gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText with gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.appendText, gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.insertText or gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.prependText and remove options with gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.remove.
If the gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText contains an entry (via the gtk.combo_box.ComboBox.hasEntry property), its contents can be retrieved using gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.getActiveText.
You should not call gtk.combo_box.ComboBox.setModel or attempt to pack more cells into this combo box via its gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout interface.
GtkComboBoxText as GtkBuildable
The gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports adding items directly using the <items> element and specifying <item> elements for each item. Each <item> element can specify the “id” corresponding to the appended text and also supports the regular translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.
Here is a UI definition fragment specifying gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText items:
<object class="GtkComboBoxText">
<items>
<item translatable="yes" id="factory">Factory</item>
<item translatable="yes" id="home">Home</item>
<item translatable="yes" id="subway">Subway</item>
</items>
</object>CSS nodes
combobox
╰── box.linked
├── entry.combo
├── button.combo
╰── window.popupgtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText has a single CSS node with name combobox. It adds the style class .combo to the main CSS nodes of its entry and button children, and the .linked class to the node of its internal box.
Deprecated
A constant value in a gtk.expression.Expression.
gtk.constraint.Constraint describes a constraint between attributes of two widgets, expressed as a linear equation.
The typical equation for a constraint is:
target.target_attr = source.source_attr × multiplier + constantEach gtk.constraint.Constraint is part of a system that will be solved by a gtk.constraint_layout.ConstraintLayout in order to allocate and position each child widget or guide.
The source and target, as well as their attributes, of a gtk.constraint.Constraint instance are immutable after creation.
GObjectClass parentClassA gtk.constraint_guide.ConstraintGuide is an invisible layout element in a gtk.constraint_layout.ConstraintLayout.
The gtk.constraint_layout.ConstraintLayout treats guides like widgets. They can be used as the source or target of a gtk.constraint.Constraint.
Guides have a minimum, maximum and natural size. Depending on the constraints that are applied, they can act like a guideline that widgets can be aligned to, or like *flexible space*.
Unlike a gtk.widget.Widget, a gtk.constraint_guide.ConstraintGuide will not be drawn.
GObjectClass parentClassA layout manager using constraints to describe relations between widgets.
gtk.constraint_layout.ConstraintLayout is a layout manager that uses relations between widget attributes, expressed via gtk.constraint.Constraint instances, to measure and allocate widgets.
How do constraints work
Constraints are objects defining the relationship between attributes of a widget; you can read the description of the gtk.constraint.Constraint class to have a more in depth definition.
By taking multiple constraints and applying them to the children of a widget using gtk.constraint_layout.ConstraintLayout, it's possible to describe complex layout policies; each constraint applied to a child or to the parent widgets contributes to the full description of the layout, in terms of parameters for resolving the value of each attribute.
It is important to note that a layout is defined by the totality of constraints; removing a child, or a constraint, from an existing layout without changing the remaining constraints may result in an unstable or unsolvable layout.
Constraints have an implicit "reading order"; you should start describing each edge of each child, as well as their relationship with the parent container, from the top left (or top right, in RTL languages), horizontally first, and then vertically.
A constraint-based layout with too few constraints can become "unstable", that is: have more than one solution. The behavior of an unstable layout is undefined.
A constraint-based layout with conflicting constraints may be unsolvable, and lead to an unstable layout. You can use the gtk.constraint.Constraint.strength property of gtk.constraint.Constraint to "nudge" the layout towards a solution.
GtkConstraintLayout as GtkBuildable
gtk.constraint_layout.ConstraintLayout implements the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface and has a custom "constraints" element which allows describing constraints in a gtk.builder.Builder UI file.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying a constraint:
<object class="GtkConstraintLayout">
<constraints>
<constraint target="button" target-attribute="start"
relation="eq"
source="super" source-attribute="start"
constant="12"
strength="required" />
<constraint target="button" target-attribute="width"
relation="ge"
constant="250"
strength="strong" />
</constraints>
</object>The definition above will add two constraints to the GtkConstraintLayout:
- a required constraint between the leading edge of "button" and the leading edge of the widget using the constraint layout, plus 12 pixels
- a strong, constant constraint making the width of "button" greater than, or equal to 250 pixels
The "target" and "target-attribute" attributes are required.
The "source" and "source-attribute" attributes of the "constraint" element are optional; if they are not specified, the constraint is assumed to be a constant.
The "relation" attribute is optional; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to be an equality.
The "strength" attribute is optional; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to be required.
The "source" and "target" attributes can be set to "super" to indicate that the constraint target is the widget using the GtkConstraintLayout.
There can be "constant" and "multiplier" attributes.
Additionally, the "constraints" element can also contain a description of the GtkConstraintGuides used by the layout:
<constraints>
<guide min-width="100" max-width="500" name="hspace"/>
<guide min-height="64" nat-height="128" name="vspace" strength="strong"/>
</constraints>The "guide" element has the following optional attributes:
- "min-width", "nat-width", and "max-width", describe the minimum, natural, and maximum width of the guide, respectively
- "min-height", "nat-height", and "max-height", describe the minimum, natural, and maximum height of the guide, respectively
- "strength" describes the strength of the constraint on the natural size of the guide; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to have a medium strength
- "name" describes a name for the guide, useful when debugging
Using the Visual Format Language
Complex constraints can be described using a compact syntax called VFL, or Visual Format Language.
The Visual Format Language describes all the constraints on a row or column, typically starting from the leading edge towards the trailing one. Each element of the layout is composed by "views", which identify a gtk.constraint_target.ConstraintTarget.
For instance:
[button]-[textField]Describes a constraint that binds the trailing edge of "button" to the leading edge of "textField", leaving a default space between the two.
Using VFL is also possible to specify predicates that describe constraints on attributes like width and height:
// Width must be greater than, or equal to 50
[button(>=50)]
// Width of button1 must be equal to width of button2
[button1(==button2)]The default orientation for a VFL description is horizontal, unless otherwise specified:
// horizontal orientation, default attribute: width
H:[button(>=150)]
// vertical orientation, default attribute: height
V:[button1(==button2)]It's also possible to specify multiple predicates, as well as their strength:
// minimum width of button must be 150
// natural width of button can be 250
[button(>=150@required, ==250@medium)]Finally, it's also possible to use simple arithmetic operators:
// width of button1 must be equal to width of button2
// divided by 2 plus 12
[button1(button2 / 2 + 12)]gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild subclass for children in a gtk.constraint_layout.ConstraintLayout.
GtkLayoutChildClass parentClassGtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassThe gtk.constraint_target.ConstraintTarget interface is implemented by objects that can be used as source or target in gtk.constraint.Constraints.
Besides gtk.widget.Widget, it is also implemented by gtk.constraint_guide.ConstraintGuide.
size_t bytessize_t charssize_t linessize_t lineBytessize_t lineCharsgtk.css_provider.CssProvider is an object implementing the gtk.style_provider.StyleProvider interface for CSS.
It is able to parse CSS-like input in order to style widgets.
An application can make GTK parse a specific CSS style sheet by calling gtk.css_provider.CssProvider.loadFromFile or gtk.css_provider.CssProvider.loadFromResource and adding the provider with gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProvider or gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProviderForDisplay.
In addition, certain files will be read when GTK is initialized. First, the file $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0/gtk.css is loaded if it exists. Then, GTK loads the first existing file among XDG_DATA_HOME/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css, $HOME/.themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css, $XDG_DATA_DIRS/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css and DATADIR/share/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css, where THEME is the name of the current theme (see the gtk.settings.Settings.gtkThemeName setting), VARIANT is the variant to load (see the gtk.settings.Settings.gtkApplicationPreferDarkTheme setting), DATADIR is the prefix configured when GTK was compiled (unless overridden by the GTK_DATA_PREFIX environment variable), and VERSION is the GTK version number. If no file is found for the current version, GTK tries older versions all the way back to 4.0.
To track errors while loading CSS, connect to the gtk.css_provider.CssProvider.parsingError signal.
GObject parentInstanceDefines a part of a CSS document.
Because sections are nested into one another, you can use gtk.css_section.CssSection.getParent to get the containing region.
gtk.custom_filter.CustomFilter determines whether to include items with a callback.
GtkFilterClass parentClassgtk.custom_layout.CustomLayout uses closures for size negotiation.
A GtkCustomLayout uses closures matching to the old gtk.widget.Widget virtual functions for size negotiation, as a convenience API to ease the porting towards the corresponding `GtkLayoutManager virtual functions.
GtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassgtk.custom_sorter.CustomSorter is a gtk.sorter.Sorter implementation that sorts via a callback function.
GtkSorterClass parentClassDialogs are a convenient way to prompt the user for a small amount of input.
Typical uses are to display a message, ask a question, or anything else that does not require extensive effort on the user’s part.
The main area of a gtk.dialog.Dialog is called the "content area", and is yours to populate with widgets such a gtk.label.Label or gtk.entry.Entry, to present your information, questions, or tasks to the user.
In addition, dialogs allow you to add "action widgets". Most commonly, action widgets are buttons. Depending on the platform, action widgets may be presented in the header bar at the top of the window, or at the bottom of the window. To add action widgets, create your gtk.dialog.Dialog using gtk.dialog.Dialog.newWithButtons, or use gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButton, gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButtons, or gtk.dialog.Dialog.addActionWidget.
GtkDialogs uses some heuristics to decide whether to add a close button to the window decorations. If any of the action buttons use the response ID gtk.types.ResponseType.Close or gtk.types.ResponseType.Cancel, the close button is omitted.
Clicking a button that was added as an action widget will emit the gtk.dialog.Dialog.response signal with a response ID that you specified. GTK will never assign a meaning to positive response IDs; these are entirely user-defined. But for convenience, you can use the response IDs in the gtk.types.ResponseType enumeration (these all have values less than zero). If a dialog receives a delete event, the gtk.dialog.Dialog.response signal will be emitted with the gtk.types.ResponseType.DeleteEvent response ID.
Dialogs are created with a call to gtk.dialog.Dialog.new_ or gtk.dialog.Dialog.newWithButtons. The latter is recommended; it allows you to set the dialog title, some convenient flags, and add buttons.
A “modal” dialog (that is, one which freezes the rest of the application from user input), can be created by calling gtk.window.Window.setModal on the dialog. When using gtk.dialog.Dialog.newWithButtons, you can also pass the gtk.types.DialogFlags.Modal flag to make a dialog modal.
For the simple dialog in the following example, a gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog would save some effort. But you’d need to create the dialog contents manually if you had more than a simple message in the dialog.
An example for simple gtk.dialog.Dialog usage:
// Function to open a dialog box with a message
void
quick_message (GtkWindow *parent, char *message)
{
GtkWidget *dialog, *label, *content_area;
GtkDialogFlags flags;
// Create the widgets
flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("Message",
parent,
flags,
_("_OK"),
GTK_RESPONSE_NONE,
NULL);
content_area = gtk_dialog_get_content_area (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
label = gtk_label_new (message);
// Ensure that the dialog box is destroyed when the user responds
g_signal_connect_swapped (dialog,
"response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy),
dialog);
// Add the label, and show everything we’ve added
gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (content_area), label);
gtk_widget_show (dialog);
}GtkDialog as GtkBuildable
The gtk.dialog.Dialog implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface exposes the @content_area as an internal child with the name “content_area”.
gtk.dialog.Dialog supports a custom <action-widgets> element, which can contain multiple <action-widget> elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogs @action_area). To mark a response as default, set the “default” attribute of the <action-widget> element to true.
gtk.dialog.Dialog supports adding action widgets by specifying “action” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. The widget will be added either to the action area or the headerbar of the dialog, depending on the “use-header-bar” property. The response id has to be associated with the action widget using the <action-widgets> element.
An example of a gtk.dialog.Dialog UI definition fragment:
<object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
<child type="action">
<object class="GtkButton" id="button_cancel"/>
</child>
<child type="action">
<object class="GtkButton" id="button_ok">
</object>
</child>
<action-widgets>
<action-widget response="cancel">button_cancel</action-widget>
<action-widget response="ok" default="true">button_ok</action-widget>
</action-widgets>
</object>Accessibility
gtk.dialog.Dialog uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Dialog role.
Deprecated
GtkWindow parentInstanceGtkWindowClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkDialog * dialog, int responseId) responseSignal emitted when an action widget is activated.void function(GtkDialog * dialog) closeSignal emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close the dialog.void *[8] paddinggtk.directory_list.DirectoryList is a list model that wraps gio.file.File.enumerateChildrenAsync.
It presents a gio.list_model.ListModel and fills it asynchronously with the gio.file_info.FileInfos returned from that function.
Enumeration will start automatically when the gtk.directory_list.DirectoryList.file property is set.
While the gtk.directory_list.DirectoryList is being filled, the gtk.directory_list.DirectoryList.loading property will be set to true. You can listen to that property if you want to show information like a gtk.spinner.Spinner or a "Loading..." text.
If loading fails at any point, the gtk.directory_list.DirectoryList.error property will be set to give more indication about the failure.
The gio.file_info.FileInfos returned from a gtk.directory_list.DirectoryList have the "standard::file" attribute set to the gio.file.File they refer to. This way you can get at the file that is referred to in the same way you would via gio.file_enumerator.FileEnumerator.getChild. This means you do not need access to the gtk.directory_list.DirectoryList, but can access the gio.file.File directly from the gio.file_info.FileInfo when operating with a gtk.list_view.ListView or similar.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.drag_icon.DragIcon is a gtk.root.Root implementation for drag icons.
A drag icon moves with the pointer during a Drag-and-Drop operation and is destroyed when the drag ends.
To set up a drag icon and associate it with an ongoing drag operation, use gtk.drag_icon.DragIcon.getForDrag to get the icon for a drag. You can then use it like any other widget and use gtk.drag_icon.DragIcon.setChild to set whatever widget should be used for the drag icon.
Keep in mind that drag icons do not allow user input.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgtk.drag_source.DragSource is an event controller to initiate Drag-And-Drop operations.
gtk.drag_source.DragSource can be set up with the necessary ingredients for a DND operation ahead of time. This includes the source for the data that is being transferred, in the form of a gdk.content_provider.ContentProvider, the desired action, and the icon to use during the drag operation. After setting it up, the drag source must be added to a widget as an event controller, using gtk.widget.Widget.addController.
static void
my_widget_init (MyWidget *self)
{
GtkDragSource *drag_source = gtk_drag_source_new ();
g_signal_connect (drag_source, "prepare", G_CALLBACK (on_drag_prepare), self);
g_signal_connect (drag_source, "drag-begin", G_CALLBACK (on_drag_begin), self);
gtk_widget_add_controller (GTK_WIDGET (self), GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER (drag_source));
}Setting up the content provider and icon ahead of time only makes sense when the data does not change. More commonly, you will want to set them up just in time. To do so, gtk.drag_source.DragSource has gtk.drag_source.DragSource.prepare and gtk.drag_source.DragSource.dragBegin signals.
The ::prepare signal is emitted before a drag is started, and can be used to set the content provider and actions that the drag should be started with.
static GdkContentProvider *
on_drag_prepare (GtkDragSource *source,
double x,
double y,
MyWidget *self)
{
// This widget supports two types of content: GFile objects
// and GdkPixbuf objects; GTK will handle the serialization
// of these types automatically
GFile *file = my_widget_get_file (self);
GdkPixbuf *pixbuf = my_widget_get_pixbuf (self);
return gdk_content_provider_new_union ((GdkContentProvider *[2]) {
gdk_content_provider_new_typed (G_TYPE_FILE, file),
gdk_content_provider_new_typed (GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF, pixbuf),
}, 2);
}The ::drag-begin signal is emitted after the gdk.drag.Drag object has been created, and can be used to set up the drag icon.
static void
on_drag_begin (GtkDragSource *source,
GdkDrag *drag,
MyWidget *self)
{
// Set the widget as the drag icon
GdkPaintable *paintable = gtk_widget_paintable_new (GTK_WIDGET (self));
gtk_drag_source_set_icon (source, paintable, 0, 0);
g_object_unref (paintable);
}During the DND operation, gtk.drag_source.DragSource emits signals that can be used to obtain updates about the status of the operation, but it is not normally necessary to connect to any signals, except for one case: when the supported actions include gdk.types.DragAction.Move, you need to listen for the gtk.drag_source.DragSource.dragEnd signal and delete the data after it has been transferred.
gtk.drawing_area.DrawingArea is a widget that allows drawing with cairo.
It’s essentially a blank widget; you can draw on it. After creating a drawing area, the application may want to connect to:
- The gtk.widget.Widget.realize signal to take any necessary actions when the widget is instantiated on a particular display. (Create GDK resources in response to this signal.)
- The gtk.drawing_area.DrawingArea.resize signal to take any necessary actions when the widget changes size.
- Call gtk.drawing_area.DrawingArea.setDrawFunc to handle redrawing the contents of the widget.
The following code portion demonstrates using a drawing area to display a circle in the normal widget foreground color.
Simple GtkDrawingArea usage
static void
draw_function (GtkDrawingArea *area,
cairo_t *cr,
int width,
int height,
gpointer data)
{
GdkRGBA color;
cairo_arc (cr,
width / 2.0, height / 2.0,
MIN (width, height) / 2.0,
0, 2 * G_PI);
gtk_widget_get_color (GTK_WIDGET (area),
&color);
gdk_cairo_set_source_rgba (cr, &color);
cairo_fill (cr);
}
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
gtk_init ();
GtkWidget *area = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
gtk_drawing_area_set_content_width (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area), 100);
gtk_drawing_area_set_content_height (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area), 100);
gtk_drawing_area_set_draw_func (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area),
draw_function,
NULL, NULL);
return 0;
}The draw function is normally called when a drawing area first comes onscreen, or when it’s covered by another window and then uncovered. You can also force a redraw by adding to the “damage region” of the drawing area’s window using gtk.widget.Widget.queueDraw. This will cause the drawing area to call the draw function again.
The available routines for drawing are documented in the Cairo documentation; GDK offers additional API to integrate with Cairo, like func@Gdk.cairo_set_source_rgba or func@Gdk.cairo_set_source_pixbuf.
To receive mouse events on a drawing area, you will need to use event controllers. To receive keyboard events, you will need to set the “can-focus” property on the drawing area, and you should probably draw some user-visible indication that the drawing area is focused.
If you need more complex control over your widget, you should consider creating your own gtk.widget.Widget subclass.
GtkWidget widgetGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkDrawingArea * area, int width, int height) resizevoid *[8] paddinggtk.drop_controller_motion.DropControllerMotion is an event controller tracking the pointer during Drag-and-Drop operations.
It is modeled after gtk.event_controller_motion.EventControllerMotion so if you have used that, this should feel really familiar.
This controller is not able to accept drops, use gtk.drop_target.DropTarget for that purpose.
gtk.drop_down.DropDown is a widget that allows the user to choose an item from a list of options.
The gtk.drop_down.DropDown displays the selected choice.
The options are given to gtk.drop_down.DropDown in the form of gio.list_model.ListModel and how the individual options are represented is determined by a gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory. The default factory displays simple strings, and adds a checkmark to the selected item in the popup.
To set your own factory, use gtk.drop_down.DropDown.setFactory. It is possible to use a separate factory for the items in the popup, with gtk.drop_down.DropDown.setListFactory.
gtk.drop_down.DropDown knows how to obtain strings from the items in a gtk.string_list.StringList; for other models, you have to provide an expression to find the strings via gtk.drop_down.DropDown.setExpression.
gtk.drop_down.DropDown can optionally allow search in the popup, which is useful if the list of options is long. To enable the search entry, use gtk.drop_down.DropDown.setEnableSearch.
Here is a UI definition example for gtk.drop_down.DropDown with a simple model:
<object class="GtkDropDown">
<property name="model">
<object class="GtkStringList">
<items>
<item translatable="yes">Factory</item>
<item translatable="yes">Home</item>
<item translatable="yes">Subway</item>
</items>
</object>
</property>
</object>If a gtk.drop_down.DropDown is created in this manner, or with gtk.drop_down.DropDown.newFromStrings, for instance, the object returned from gtk.drop_down.DropDown.getSelectedItem will be a gtk.string_object.StringObject.
To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview.
CSS nodes
gtk.drop_down.DropDown has a single CSS node with name dropdown, with the button and popover nodes as children.
Accessibility
gtk.drop_down.DropDown uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ComboBox role.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgtk.drop_target.DropTarget is an event controller to receive Drag-and-Drop operations.
The most basic way to use a gtk.drop_target.DropTarget to receive drops on a widget is to create it via gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.new_, passing in the GType of the data you want to receive and connect to the gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.drop signal to receive the data:
static gboolean
on_drop (GtkDropTarget *target,
const GValue *value,
double x,
double y,
gpointer data)
{
MyWidget *self = data;
// Call the appropriate setter depending on the type of data
// that we received
if (G_VALUE_HOLDS (value, G_TYPE_FILE))
my_widget_set_file (self, g_value_get_object (value));
else if (G_VALUE_HOLDS (value, GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF))
my_widget_set_pixbuf (self, g_value_get_object (value));
else
return FALSE;
return TRUE;
}
static void
my_widget_init (MyWidget *self)
{
GtkDropTarget *target =
gtk_drop_target_new (G_TYPE_INVALID, GDK_ACTION_COPY);
// This widget accepts two types of drop types: GFile objects
// and GdkPixbuf objects
gtk_drop_target_set_gtypes (target, (GType [2]) {
G_TYPE_FILE,
GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF,
}, 2);
g_signal_connect (target, "drop", G_CALLBACK (on_drop), self);
gtk_widget_add_controller (GTK_WIDGET (self), GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER (target));
}gtk.drop_target.DropTarget supports more options, such as:
- rejecting potential drops via the gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.accept signal and the gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.reject function to let other drop targets handle the drop
- tracking an ongoing drag operation before the drop via the gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.enter, gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.motion and gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.leave signals
- configuring how to receive data by setting the gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.preload property and listening for its availability via the gtk.drop_target.DropTarget.value property
However, gtk.drop_target.DropTarget is ultimately modeled in a synchronous way and only supports data transferred via GType. If you want full control over an ongoing drop, the gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync object gives you this ability.
While a pointer is dragged over the drop target's widget and the drop has not been rejected, that widget will receive the gtk.types.StateFlags.DropActive state, which can be used to style the widget.
If you are not interested in receiving the drop, but just want to update UI state during a Drag-and-Drop operation (e.g. switching tabs), you can use gtk.drop_controller_motion.DropControllerMotion.
gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync is an event controller to receive Drag-and-Drop operations, asynchronously.
It is the more complete but also more complex method of handling drop operations compared to gtk.drop_target.DropTarget, and you should only use it if gtk.drop_target.DropTarget doesn't provide all the features you need.
To use a gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync to receive drops on a widget, you create a gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync object, configure which data formats and actions you support, connect to its signals, and then attach it to the widget with gtk.widget.Widget.addController.
During a drag operation, the first signal that a gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync emits is gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync.accept, which is meant to determine whether the target is a possible drop site for the ongoing drop. The default handler for the ::accept signal accepts the drop if it finds a compatible data format and an action that is supported on both sides.
If it is, and the widget becomes a target, you will receive a gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync.dragEnter signal, followed by gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync.dragMotion signals as the pointer moves, optionally a gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync.drop signal when a drop happens, and finally a gtk.drop_target_async.DropTargetAsync.dragLeave signal when the pointer moves off the widget.
The ::drag-enter and ::drag-motion handler return a gdk.types.DragAction to update the status of the ongoing operation. The ::drop handler should decide if it ultimately accepts the drop and if it does, it should initiate the data transfer and finish the operation by calling gdk.drop.Drop.finish.
Between the ::drag-enter and ::drag-leave signals the widget is a current drop target, and will receive the gtk.types.StateFlags.DropActive state, which can be used by themes to style the widget as a drop target.
gtk.editable.Editable is an interface for text editing widgets.
Typical examples of editable widgets are gtk.entry.Entry and gtk.spin_button.SpinButton. It contains functions for generically manipulating an editable widget, a large number of action signals used for key bindings, and several signals that an application can connect to modify the behavior of a widget.
As an example of the latter usage, by connecting the following handler to gtk.editable.Editable.insertText, an application can convert all entry into a widget into uppercase.
Forcing entry to uppercase.
#include <ctype.h>
void
insert_text_handler (GtkEditable *editable,
const char *text,
int length,
int *position,
gpointer data)
{
char *result = g_utf8_strup (text, length);
g_signal_handlers_block_by_func (editable,
(gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);
gtk_editable_insert_text (editable, result, length, position);
g_signal_handlers_unblock_by_func (editable,
(gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);
g_signal_stop_emission_by_name (editable, "insert_text");
g_free (result);
}Implementing GtkEditable
The most likely scenario for implementing gtk.editable.Editable on your own widget is that you will embed a gtk.text.Text inside a complex widget, and want to delegate the editable functionality to that text widget. gtk.editable.Editable provides some utility functions to make this easy.
In your class_init function, call gtk.editable.Editable.installProperties, passing the first available property ID:
static void
my_class_init (MyClass *class)
{
...
g_object_class_install_properties (object_class, NUM_PROPERTIES, props);
gtk_editable_install_properties (object_clas, NUM_PROPERTIES);
...
}In your interface_init function for the gtk.editable.Editable interface, provide an implementation for the get_delegate vfunc that returns your text widget:
GtkEditable *
get_editable_delegate (GtkEditable *editable)
{
return GTK_EDITABLE (MY_WIDGET (editable)->text_widget);
}
static void
my_editable_init (GtkEditableInterface *iface)
{
iface->get_delegate = get_editable_delegate;
}You don't need to provide any other vfuncs. The default implementations work by forwarding to the delegate that the GtkEditableInterface.get_delegate() vfunc returns.
In your instance_init function, create your text widget, and then call gtk.editable.Editable.initDelegate:
static void
my_widget_init (MyWidget *self)
{
...
self->text_widget = gtk_text_new ();
gtk_editable_init_delegate (GTK_EDITABLE (self));
...
}In your dispose function, call gtk.editable.Editable.finishDelegate before destroying your text widget:
static void
my_widget_dispose (GObject *object)
{
...
gtk_editable_finish_delegate (GTK_EDITABLE (self));
g_clear_pointer (&self->text_widget, gtk_widget_unparent);
...
}Finally, use gtk.editable.Editable.delegateSetProperty in your set_property function (and similar for get_property), to set the editable properties:
...
if (gtk_editable_delegate_set_property (object, prop_id, value, pspec))
return;
switch (prop_id)
...It is important to note that if you create a gtk.editable.Editable that uses a delegate, the low level gtk.editable.Editable.insertText and gtk.editable.Editable.deleteText signals will be propagated from the "wrapper" editable to the delegate, but they will not be propagated from the delegate to the "wrapper" editable, as they would cause an infinite recursion. If you wish to connect to the gtk.editable.Editable.insertText and gtk.editable.Editable.deleteText signals, you will need to connect to them on the delegate obtained via gtk.editable.Editable.getDelegate.
GTypeInterface baseIfacevoid function(GtkEditable * editable, const(char) * text, int length, int * position) insertTextvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, int startPos, int endPos) deleteTextvoid function(GtkEditable * editable) changedconst(char) * function(GtkEditable * editable) getTextvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, const(char) * text, int length, int * position) doInsertTextvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, int startPos, int endPos) doDeleteTextgboolean function(GtkEditable * editable, int * startPos, int * endPos) getSelectionBoundsvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, int startPos, int endPos) setSelectionBoundsGtkEditable * function(GtkEditable * editable) getDelegateA gtk.editable_label.EditableLabel is a label that allows users to edit the text by switching to an “edit mode”.
gtk.editable_label.EditableLabel does not have API of its own, but it implements the gtk.editable.Editable interface.
The default bindings for activating the edit mode is to click or press the Enter key. The default bindings for leaving the edit mode are the Enter key (to save the results) or the Escape key (to cancel the editing).
CSS nodes
editablelabel[.editing]
╰── stack
├── label
╰── textgtk.editable_label.EditableLabel has a main node with the name editablelabel. When the entry is in editing mode, it gets the .editing style class.
For all the subnodes added to the text node in various situations, see gtk.text.Text.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassThe gtk.emoji_chooser.EmojiChooser is used by text widgets such as gtk.entry.Entry or gtk.text_view.TextView to let users insert Emoji characters.
gtk.emoji_chooser.EmojiChooser emits the gtk.emoji_chooser.EmojiChooser.emojiPicked signal when an Emoji is selected.
CSS nodes
popover
├── box.emoji-searchbar
│ ╰── entry.search
╰── box.emoji-toolbar
├── button.image-button.emoji-section
├── ...
╰── button.image-button.emoji-sectionEvery gtk.emoji_chooser.EmojiChooser consists of a main node called popover. The contents of the popover are largely implementation defined and supposed to inherit general styles. The top searchbar used to search emoji and gets the .emoji-searchbar style class itself. The bottom toolbar used to switch between different emoji categories consists of buttons with the .emoji-section style class and gets the .emoji-toolbar style class itself.
gtk.entry.Entry is a single line text entry widget.
A fairly large set of key bindings are supported by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor position is visible.
When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information, it can be put into “password mode” using gtk.entry.Entry.setVisibility. In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character. By default, GTK picks the best invisible character that is available in the current font, but it can be changed with gtk.entry.Entry.setInvisibleChar.
gtk.entry.Entry has the ability to display progress or activity information behind the text. To make an entry display such information, use gtk.entry.Entry.setProgressFraction or gtk.entry.Entry.setProgressPulseStep.
Additionally, gtk.entry.Entry can show icons at either side of the entry. These icons can be activatable by clicking, can be set up as drag source and can have tooltips. To add an icon, use gtk.entry.Entry.setIconFromGicon or one of the various other functions that set an icon from an icon name or a paintable. To trigger an action when the user clicks an icon, connect to the gtk.entry.Entry.iconPress signal. To allow DND operations from an icon, use gtk.entry.Entry.setIconDragSource. To set a tooltip on an icon, use gtk.entry.Entry.setIconTooltipText or the corresponding function for markup.
Note that functionality or information that is only available by clicking on an icon in an entry may not be accessible at all to users which are not able to use a mouse or other pointing device. It is therefore recommended that any such functionality should also be available by other means, e.g. via the context menu of the entry.
CSS nodes
entry[.flat][.warning][.error]
├── text[.readonly]
├── image.left
├── image.right
╰── [progress[.pulse]]gtk.entry.Entry has a main node with the name entry. Depending on the properties of the entry, the style classes .read-only and .flat may appear. The style classes .warning and .error may also be used with entries.
When the entry shows icons, it adds subnodes with the name image and the style class .left or .right, depending on where the icon appears.
When the entry shows progress, it adds a subnode with the name progress. The node has the style class .pulse when the shown progress is pulsing.
For all the subnodes added to the text node in various situations, see gtk.text.Text.
GtkEntry as GtkBuildable
The gtk.entry.Entry implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports a custom <attributes> element, which supports any number of <attribute> elements. The <attribute> element has attributes named “name“, “value“, “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specify pango.attribute.Attribute values for this label.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes:
<object class="GtkEntry">
<attributes>
<attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/>
<attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/>
</attributes>
</object>The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable content instead.
Accessibility
gtk.entry.Entry uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TextBox role.
GtkWidget parentInstanceA gtk.entry_buffer.EntryBuffer hold the text displayed in a gtk.text.Text widget.
A single gtk.entry_buffer.EntryBuffer object can be shared by multiple widgets which will then share the same text content, but not the cursor position, visibility attributes, icon etc.
gtk.entry_buffer.EntryBuffer may be derived from. Such a derived class might allow text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory, useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could integrate with an application’s concept of undo/redo.
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, const(char) * chars, uint nChars) insertedTextvoid function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, uint nChars) deletedTextconst(char) * function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, size_t * nBytes) getTextuint function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer) getLengthuint function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, const(char) * chars, uint nChars) insertTextuint function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, uint nChars) deleteTextvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8Class structure for gtk.entry.Entry. All virtual functions have a default implementation. Derived classes may set the virtual function pointers for the signal handlers to null, but must keep @get_text_area_size and @get_frame_size non-null; either use the default implementation, or provide a custom one.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkEntry * entry) activateClass handler for the `GtkEntry::activate` signal. The default implementation activates the gtk.activate-default action.void *[8] paddinggtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion is an auxiliary object to provide completion functionality for gtk.entry.Entry.
It implements the gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout interface, to allow the user to add extra cells to the gtk.tree_view.TreeView with completion matches.
“Completion functionality” means that when the user modifies the text in the entry, gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion checks which rows in the model match the current content of the entry, and displays a list of matches. By default, the matching is done by comparing the entry text case-insensitively against the text column of the model (see gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion.setTextColumn), but this can be overridden with a custom match function (see gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion.setMatchFunc).
When the user selects a completion, the content of the entry is updated. By default, the content of the entry is replaced by the text column of the model, but this can be overridden by connecting to the gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion.matchSelected signal and updating the entry in the signal handler. Note that you should return true from the signal handler to suppress the default behaviour.
To add completion functionality to an entry, use gtk.entry.Entry.setCompletion.
gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion uses a gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter model to represent the subset of the entire model that is currently matching. While the gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion signals gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion.matchSelected and gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion.cursorOnMatch take the original model and an iter pointing to that model as arguments, other callbacks and signals (such as gtk.types.CellLayoutDataFunc or gtk.cell_area.CellArea.applyAttributes will generally take the filter model as argument. As long as you are only calling gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.get, this will make no difference to you. If for some reason, you need the original model, use gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter.getModel. Don’t forget to use gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter.convertIterToChildIter to obtain a matching iter.
gtk.event_controller.EventController is the base class for event controllers.
These are ancillary objects associated to widgets, which react to GdkEvents, and possibly trigger actions as a consequence.
Event controllers are added to a widget with gtk.widget.Widget.addController. It is rarely necessary to explicitly remove a controller with gtk.widget.Widget.removeController.
See the chapter on input handling for an overview of the basic concepts, such as the capture and bubble phases of event propagation.
gtk.event_controller_focus.EventControllerFocus is an event controller to keep track of keyboard focus.
The event controller offers gtk.event_controller_focus.EventControllerFocus.enter and gtk.event_controller_focus.EventControllerFocus.leave signals, as well as gtk.event_controller_focus.EventControllerFocus.isFocus and gtk.event_controller_focus.EventControllerFocus.containsFocus properties which are updated to reflect focus changes inside the widget hierarchy that is rooted at the controllers widget.
gtk.event_controller_key.EventControllerKey is an event controller that provides access to key events.
gtk.event_controller_legacy.EventControllerLegacy is an event controller that provides raw access to the event stream.
It should only be used as a last resort if none of the other event controllers or gestures do the job.
gtk.event_controller_motion.EventControllerMotion is an event controller tracking the pointer position.
The event controller offers gtk.event_controller_motion.EventControllerMotion.enter and gtk.event_controller_motion.EventControllerMotion.leave signals, as well as gtk.event_controller_motion.EventControllerMotion.isPointer and gtk.event_controller_motion.EventControllerMotion.containsPointer properties which are updated to reflect changes in the pointer position as it moves over the widget.
gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll is an event controller that handles scroll events.
It is capable of handling both discrete and continuous scroll events from mice or touchpads, abstracting them both with the gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.scroll signal. Deltas in the discrete case are multiples of 1.
In the case of continuous scroll events, gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll encloses all gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.scroll emissions between two gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.scrollBegin and gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.scrollEnd signals.
The behavior of the event controller can be modified by the flags given at creation time, or modified at a later point through gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.setFlags (e.g. because the scrolling conditions of the widget changed).
The controller can be set up to emit motion for either/both vertical and horizontal scroll events through gtk.types.EventControllerScrollFlags.Vertical, gtk.types.EventControllerScrollFlags.Horizontal and gtk.types.EventControllerScrollFlags.BothAxes. If any axis is disabled, the respective gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.scroll delta will be 0. Vertical scroll events will be translated to horizontal motion for the devices incapable of horizontal scrolling.
The event controller can also be forced to emit discrete events on all devices through gtk.types.EventControllerScrollFlags.Discrete. This can be used to implement discrete actions triggered through scroll events (e.g. switching across combobox options).
The gtk.types.EventControllerScrollFlags.Kinetic flag toggles the emission of the gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.decelerate signal, emitted at the end of scrolling with two X/Y velocity arguments that are consistent with the motion that was received.
gtk.every_filter.EveryFilter matches an item when each of its filters matches.
To add filters to a gtk.every_filter.EveryFilter, use gtk.multi_filter.MultiFilter.append.
gtk.expander.Expander allows the user to reveal its child by clicking on an expander triangle.
This is similar to the triangles used in a gtk.tree_view.TreeView.
Normally you use an expander as you would use a frame; you create the child widget and use gtk.expander.Expander.setChild to add it to the expander. When the expander is toggled, it will take care of showing and hiding the child automatically.
Special Usage
There are situations in which you may prefer to show and hide the expanded widget yourself, such as when you want to actually create the widget at expansion time. In this case, create a gtk.expander.Expander but do not add a child to it. The expander widget has an gtk.expander.Expander.expanded property which can be used to monitor its expansion state. You should watch this property with a signal connection as follows:
static void
expander_callback (GObject *object,
GParamSpec *param_spec,
gpointer user_data)
{
GtkExpander *expander;
expander = GTK_EXPANDER (object);
if (gtk_expander_get_expanded (expander))
{
// Show or create widgets
}
else
{
// Hide or destroy widgets
}
}
static void
create_expander (void)
{
GtkWidget *expander = gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic ("_More Options");
g_signal_connect (expander, "notify::expanded",
G_CALLBACK (expander_callback), NULL);
// ...
}GtkExpander as GtkBuildable
The gtk.expander.Expander implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.
An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkExpander:
<object class="GtkExpander">
<child type="label">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="expander-label"/>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkEntry" id="expander-content"/>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
expander-widget
╰── box
├── title
│ ├── expander
│ ╰── <label widget>
╰── <child>gtk.expander.Expander has a main node expander-widget, and subnode box containing the title and child widget. The box subnode title contains node expander, i.e. the expand/collapse arrow; then the label widget if any. The arrow of an expander that is showing its child gets the :checked pseudoclass set on it.
Accessibility
gtk.expander.Expander uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Button role.
gtk.expression.Expression provides a way to describe references to values.
An important aspect of expressions is that the value can be obtained from a source that is several steps away. For example, an expression may describe ‘the value of property A of object1, which is itself the value of a property of object2’. And object1 may not even exist yet at the time that the expression is created. This is contrast to gobject.object.ObjectWrap property bindings, which can only create direct connections between the properties of two objects that must both exist for the duration of the binding.
An expression needs to be "evaluated" to obtain the value that it currently refers to. An evaluation always happens in the context of a current object called this (it mirrors the behavior of object-oriented languages), which may or may not influence the result of the evaluation. Use gtk.expression.Expression.evaluate for evaluating an expression.
Various methods for defining expressions exist, from simple constants via gtk.constant_expression.ConstantExpression.new_ to looking up properties in a gobject.object.ObjectWrap (even recursively) via gtk.property_expression.PropertyExpression.new_ or providing custom functions to transform and combine expressions via gtk.closure_expression.ClosureExpression.new_.
Here is an example of a complex expression:
color_expr = gtk_property_expression_new (GTK_TYPE_LIST_ITEM,
NULL, "item");
expression = gtk_property_expression_new (GTK_TYPE_COLOR,
color_expr, "name");when evaluated with this being a gtk.list_item.ListItem, it will obtain the "item" property from the gtk.list_item.ListItem, and then obtain the "name" property from the resulting object (which is assumed to be of type GTK_TYPE_COLOR).
A more concise way to describe this would be
this->item->nameThe most likely place where you will encounter expressions is in the context of list models and list widgets using them. For example, gtk.drop_down.DropDown is evaluating a gtk.expression.Expression to obtain strings from the items in its model that it can then use to match against the contents of its search entry. gtk.string_filter.StringFilter is using a gtk.expression.Expression for similar reasons.
By default, expressions are not paying attention to changes and evaluation is just a snapshot of the current state at a given time. To get informed about changes, an expression needs to be "watched" via a gtk.expression_watch.ExpressionWatch, which will cause a callback to be called whenever the value of the expression may have changed; gtk.expression.Expression.watch starts watching an expression, and gtk.expression_watch.ExpressionWatch.unwatch stops.
Watches can be created for automatically updating the property of an object, similar to GObject's gobject.binding.Binding mechanism, by using gtk.expression.Expression.bind.
GtkExpression in GObject properties
In order to use a gtk.expression.Expression as a gobject.object.ObjectWrap property, you must use the func@Gtk.param_spec_expression when creating a gobject.param_spec.ParamSpec to install in the gobject.object.ObjectWrap class being defined; for instance:
obj_props[PROP_EXPRESSION] =
gtk_param_spec_expression ("expression",
"Expression",
"The expression used by the widget",
G_PARAM_READWRITE |
G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS |
G_PARAM_EXPLICIT_NOTIFY);When implementing the GObjectClass.set_property and GObjectClass.get_property virtual functions, you must use func@Gtk.value_get_expression, to retrieve the stored gtk.expression.Expression from the gobject.value.Value container, and func@Gtk.value_set_expression, to store the gtk.expression.Expression into the gobject.value.Value; for instance:
// in set_property()...
case PROP_EXPRESSION:
foo_widget_set_expression (foo, gtk_value_get_expression (value));
break;
// in get_property()...
case PROP_EXPRESSION:
gtk_value_set_expression (value, foo->expression);
break;GtkExpression in .ui files
gtk.builder.Builder has support for creating expressions. The syntax here can be used where a gtk.expression.Expression object is needed like in a <property> tag for an expression property, or in a <binding name="property"> tag to bind a property to an expression.
To create a property expression, use the <lookup> element. It can have a type attribute to specify the object type, and a name attribute to specify the property to look up. The content of <lookup> can either be an element specifying the expression to use the object, or a string that specifies the name of the object to use.
Example:
<lookup name='search'>string_filter</lookup>Since the <lookup> element creates an expression and its element content can itself be an expression, this means that <lookup> tags can also be nested. This is a common idiom when dealing with gtk.list_item.ListItems. See gtk.builder_list_item_factory.BuilderListItemFactory for an example of this technique.
To create a constant expression, use the <constant> element. If the type attribute is specified, the element content is interpreted as a value of that type. Otherwise, it is assumed to be an object. For instance:
<constant>string_filter</constant>
<constant type='gchararray'>Hello, world</constant>To create a closure expression, use the <closure> element. The function attribute specifies what function to use for the closure, and the type attribute specifies its return type. The content of the element contains the expressions for the parameters. For instance:
<closure type='gchararray' function='combine_args_somehow'>
<constant type='gchararray'>File size:</constant>
<lookup type='GFile' name='size'>myfile</lookup>
</closure>To create a property binding, use the <binding> element in place of where a <property> tag would ordinarily be used. The name and object attributes are supported. The name attribute is required, and pertains to the applicable property name. The object attribute is optional. If provided, it will use the specified object as the this object when the expression is evaluated. Here is an example in which the label property of a gtk.label.Label is bound to the string property of another arbitrary object:
<object class='GtkLabel'>
<binding name='label'>
<lookup name='string'>some_other_object</lookup>
</binding>
</object>An opaque structure representing a watched gtk.expression.Expression.
The contents of gtk.expression_watch.ExpressionWatch should only be accessed through the provided API.
gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser is an interface that can be implemented by file selection widgets.
In GTK, the main objects that implement this interface are gtk.file_chooser_widget.FileChooserWidget and gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog.
You do not need to write an object that implements the gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser interface unless you are trying to adapt an existing file selector to expose a standard programming interface.
gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser allows for shortcuts to various places in the filesystem. In the default implementation these are displayed in the left pane. It may be a bit confusing at first that these shortcuts come from various sources and in various flavours, so lets explain the terminology here:
- Bookmarks: are created by the user, by dragging folders from the right pane to the left pane, or by using the “Add”. Bookmarks can be renamed and deleted by the user.
- Shortcuts: can be provided by the application. For example, a Paint program may want to add a shortcut for a Clipart folder. Shortcuts cannot be modified by the user.
- Volumes: are provided by the underlying filesystem abstraction. They are the “roots” of the filesystem.
File Names and Encodings
When the user is finished selecting files in a gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser, your program can get the selected filenames as gio.file.Files.
Adding options
You can add extra widgets to a file chooser to provide options that are not present in the default design, by using gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.addChoice. Each choice has an identifier and a user visible label; additionally, each choice can have multiple options. If a choice has no option, it will be rendered as a check button with the given label; if a choice has options, it will be rendered as a combo box.
Deprecated
gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog is a dialog suitable for use with “File Open” or “File Save” commands.
!An example GtkFileChooserDialog
This widget works by putting a gtk.file_chooser_widget.FileChooserWidget inside a gtk.dialog.Dialog. It exposes the gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser interface, so you can use all of the gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser functions on the file chooser dialog as well as those for gtk.dialog.Dialog.
Note that gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog does not have any methods of its own. Instead, you should use the functions that work on a gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.
If you want to integrate well with the platform you should use the gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative API, which will use a platform-specific dialog if available and fall back to gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog otherwise.
Typical usage
In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog to select a file for opening:
static void
on_open_response (GtkDialog *dialog,
int response)
{
if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);
g_autoptr(GFile) file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);
open_file (file);
}
gtk_window_destroy (GTK_WINDOW (dialog));
}
// ...
GtkWidget *dialog;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
parent_window,
action,
_("_Cancel"),
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
_("_Open"),
GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
NULL);
gtk_window_present (GTK_WINDOW (dialog));
g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
G_CALLBACK (on_open_response),
NULL);To use a dialog for saving, you can use this:
static void
on_save_response (GtkDialog *dialog,
int response)
{
if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);
g_autoptr(GFile) file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);
save_to_file (file);
}
gtk_window_destroy (GTK_WINDOW (dialog));
}
// ...
GtkWidget *dialog;
GtkFileChooser *chooser;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;
dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Save File",
parent_window,
action,
_("_Cancel"),
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
_("_Save"),
GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
NULL);
chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);
if (user_edited_a_new_document)
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, _("Untitled document"));
else
gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_filename);
gtk_window_present (GTK_WINDOW (dialog));
g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
G_CALLBACK (on_save_response),
NULL);Setting up a file chooser dialog
There are various cases in which you may need to use a gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog:
- To select a file for opening, use gtk.types.FileChooserAction.Open.
- To save a file for the first time, use gtk.types.FileChooserAction.Save, and suggest a name such as “Untitled” with gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setCurrentName.
- To save a file under a different name, use gtk.types.FileChooserAction.Save, and set the existing file with gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setFile.
- To choose a folder instead of a filem use gtk.types.FileChooserAction.SelectFolder.
In general, you should only cause the file chooser to show a specific folder when it is appropriate to use gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setFile, i.e. when you are doing a “Save As” command and you already have a file saved somewhere.
Response Codes
gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog inherits from gtk.dialog.Dialog, so buttons that go in its action area have response codes such as gtk.types.ResponseType.Accept and gtk.types.ResponseType.Cancel. For example, you could call gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog.new_ as follows:
GtkWidget *dialog;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
parent_window,
action,
_("_Cancel"),
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
_("_Open"),
GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
NULL);This will create buttons for “Cancel” and “Open” that use predefined response identifiers from gtk.types.ResponseType. For most dialog boxes you can use your own custom response codes rather than the ones in gtk.types.ResponseType, but gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog assumes that its “accept”-type action, e.g. an “Open” or “Save” button, will have one of the following response codes:
- gtk.types.ResponseType.Accept
- gtk.types.ResponseType.Ok
- gtk.types.ResponseType.Yes
- gtk.types.ResponseType.Apply
This is because gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog must intercept responses and switch to folders if appropriate, rather than letting the dialog terminate — the implementation uses these known response codes to know which responses can be blocked if appropriate.
To summarize, make sure you use a predefined response code when you use gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog to ensure proper operation.
CSS nodes
gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .filechooser.
Deprecated
gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative is an abstraction of a dialog suitable for use with “File Open” or “File Save as” commands.
By default, this just uses a gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog to implement the actual dialog. However, on some platforms, such as Windows and macOS, the native platform file chooser is used instead. When the application is running in a sandboxed environment without direct filesystem access (such as Flatpak), gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative may call the proper APIs (portals) to let the user choose a file and make it available to the application.
While the API of gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative closely mirrors gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog, the main difference is that there is no access to any gtk.window.Window or gtk.widget.Widget for the dialog. This is required, as there may not be one in the case of a platform native dialog.
Showing, hiding and running the dialog is handled by the gtk.native_dialog.NativeDialog functions.
Note that unlike gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog, gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative objects are not toplevel widgets, and GTK does not keep them alive. It is your responsibility to keep a reference until you are done with the object.
Typical usage
In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative to select a file for opening:
static void
on_response (GtkNativeDialog *native,
int response)
{
if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
GFile *file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);
open_file (file);
g_object_unref (file);
}
g_object_unref (native);
}
// ...
GtkFileChooserNative *native;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Open File",
parent_window,
action,
"_Open",
"_Cancel");
g_signal_connect (native, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_response), NULL);
gtk_native_dialog_show (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));To use a gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative for saving, you can use this:
static void
on_response (GtkNativeDialog *native,
int response)
{
if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
GFile *file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);
save_to_file (file);
g_object_unref (file);
}
g_object_unref (native);
}
// ...
GtkFileChooserNative *native;
GtkFileChooser *chooser;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;
native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Save File",
parent_window,
action,
"_Save",
"_Cancel");
chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
if (user_edited_a_new_document)
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, _("Untitled document"));
else
gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file, NULL);
g_signal_connect (native, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_response), NULL);
gtk_native_dialog_show (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));For more information on how to best set up a file dialog, see the gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog documentation.
Response Codes
gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative inherits from gtk.native_dialog.NativeDialog, which means it will return gtk.types.ResponseType.Accept if the user accepted, and gtk.types.ResponseType.Cancel if he pressed cancel. It can also return gtk.types.ResponseType.DeleteEvent if the window was unexpectedly closed.
Differences from gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog
There are a few things in the gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser interface that are not possible to use with gtk.file_chooser_native.FileChooserNative, as such use would prohibit the use of a native dialog.
No operations that change the dialog work while the dialog is visible. Set all the properties that are required before showing the dialog.
Win32 details
On windows the IFileDialog implementation (added in Windows Vista) is used. It supports many of the features that gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser has, but there are some things it does not handle:
- Any gtk.file_filter.FileFilter added using a mimetype
If any of these features are used the regular gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog will be used in place of the native one.
Portal details
When the org.freedesktop.portal.FileChooser portal is available on the session bus, it is used to bring up an out-of-process file chooser. Depending on the kind of session the application is running in, this may or may not be a GTK file chooser.
macOS details
On macOS the NSSavePanel and NSOpenPanel classes are used to provide native file chooser dialogs. Some features provided by gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser are not supported:
- Shortcut folders.
Deprecated
Use gtk.file_dialog.FileDialog instead
GtkNativeDialogClass parentClassgtk.file_chooser_widget.FileChooserWidget is a widget for choosing files.
It exposes the gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser interface, and you should use the methods of this interface to interact with the widget.
CSS nodes
gtk.file_chooser_widget.FileChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name filechooser.
Deprecated
A gtk.file_dialog.FileDialog object collects the arguments that are needed to present a file chooser dialog to the user, such as a title for the dialog and whether it should be modal.
The dialog is shown with gtk.file_dialog.FileDialog.open, gtk.file_dialog.FileDialog.save, etc. These APIs follow the GIO async pattern, and the result can be obtained by calling the corresponding finish function, for example gtk.file_dialog.FileDialog.openFinish.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.file_filter.FileFilter filters files by name or mime type.
gtk.file_filter.FileFilter can be used to restrict the files being shown in a gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser. Files can be filtered based on their name (with gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addPattern or gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addSuffix) or on their mime type (with gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addMimeType).
Filtering by mime types handles aliasing and subclassing of mime types; e.g. a filter for text/plain also matches a file with mime type application/rtf, since application/rtf is a subclass of text/plain. Note that gtk.file_filter.FileFilter allows wildcards for the subtype of a mime type, so you can e.g. filter for image/\*.
Normally, file filters are used by adding them to a gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser (see gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.addFilter), but it is also possible to manually use a file filter on any gtk.filter_list_model.FilterListModel containing gio.file_info.FileInfo objects.
GtkFileFilter as GtkBuildable
The gtk.file_filter.FileFilter implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports adding rules using the <mime-types> and <patterns> and <suffixes> elements and listing the rules within. Specifying a <mime-type> or <pattern> or <suffix> has the same effect as as calling gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addMimeType or gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addPattern or gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addSuffix.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying gtk.file_filter.FileFilter rules:
<object class="GtkFileFilter">
<property name="name" translatable="yes">Text and Images</property>
<mime-types>
<mime-type>text/plain</mime-type>
<mime-type>image/ *</mime-type>
</mime-types>
<patterns>
<pattern>*.txt</pattern>
</patterns>
<suffixes>
<suffix>png</suffix>
</suffixes>
</object>A gtk.file_launcher.FileLauncher object collects the arguments that are needed to open a file with an application.
Depending on system configuration, user preferences and available APIs, this may or may not show an app chooser dialog or launch the default application right away.
The operation is started with the gtk.file_launcher.FileLauncher.launch function. This API follows the GIO async pattern, and the result can be obtained by calling gtk.file_launcher.FileLauncher.launchFinish.
To launch uris that don't represent files, use gtk.uri_launcher.UriLauncher.
GObjectClass parentClassA gtk.filter.Filter object describes the filtering to be performed by a gtk.filter_list_model.FilterListModel.
The model will use the filter to determine if it should include items or not by calling gtk.filter.Filter.match for each item and only keeping the ones that the function returns true for.
Filters may change what items they match through their lifetime. In that case, they will emit the gtk.filter.Filter.changed signal to notify that previous filter results are no longer valid and that items should be checked again via gtk.filter.Filter.match.
GTK provides various pre-made filter implementations for common filtering operations. These filters often include properties that can be linked to various widgets to easily allow searches.
However, in particular for large lists or complex search methods, it is also possible to subclass gtk.filter.Filter and provide one's own filter.
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassGtkFilterMatch function(GtkFilter * self) getStrictnessvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8gtk.filter_list_model.FilterListModel is a list model that filters the elements of the underlying model according to a gtk.filter.Filter.
It hides some elements from the other model according to criteria given by a gtk.filter.Filter.
The model can be set up to do incremental filtering, so that filtering long lists doesn't block the UI. See gtk.filter_list_model.FilterListModel.setIncremental for details.
gtk.filter_list_model.FilterListModel passes through sections from the underlying model.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.fixed.Fixed places its child widgets at fixed positions and with fixed sizes.
gtk.fixed.Fixed performs no automatic layout management.
For most applications, you should not use this container! It keeps you from having to learn about the other GTK containers, but it results in broken applications. With gtk.fixed.Fixed, the following things will result in truncated text, overlapping widgets, and other display bugs:
- Themes, which may change widget sizes.
- Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.
- Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also, display of non-English text will use a different font in many cases.
In addition, gtk.fixed.Fixed does not pay attention to text direction and thus may produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK will order containers appropriately for the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the thing they label when using an RTL language, but it can’t do that with gtk.fixed.Fixed. So if you need to reorder widgets depending on the text direction, you would need to manually detect it and adjust child positions accordingly.
Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove UI elements, since you have to reposition all the other elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your application.
If you know none of these things are an issue for your application, and prefer the simplicity of gtk.fixed.Fixed, by all means use the widget. But you should be aware of the tradeoffs.
GtkWidget parentInstancegtk.fixed_layout.FixedLayout is a layout manager which can place child widgets at fixed positions.
Most applications should never use this layout manager; fixed positioning and sizing requires constant recalculations on where children need to be positioned and sized. Other layout managers perform this kind of work internally so that application developers don't need to do it. Specifically, widgets positioned in a fixed layout manager will need to take into account:
- Themes, which may change widget sizes.
- Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.
- Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also, display of non-English text will use a different font in many cases.
In addition, gtk.fixed_layout.FixedLayout does not pay attention to text direction and thus may produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK will order containers appropriately depending on the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the thing they label when using an RTL language; gtk.fixed_layout.FixedLayout won't be able to do that for you.
Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove UI elements, since you have to reposition all the other elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your application.
gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild subclass for children in a gtk.fixed_layout.FixedLayout.
GtkLayoutChildClass parentClassGtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassgtk.flatten_list_model.FlattenListModel is a list model that concatenates other list models.
gtk.flatten_list_model.FlattenListModel takes a list model containing list models, and flattens it into a single model. Each list model becomes a section in the single model.
GObjectClass parentClassA gtk.flow_box.FlowBox puts child widgets in reflowing grid.
For instance, with the horizontal orientation, the widgets will be arranged from left to right, starting a new row under the previous row when necessary. Reducing the width in this case will require more rows, so a larger height will be requested.
Likewise, with the vertical orientation, the widgets will be arranged from top to bottom, starting a new column to the right when necessary. Reducing the height will require more columns, so a larger width will be requested.
The size request of a gtk.flow_box.FlowBox alone may not be what you expect; if you need to be able to shrink it along both axes and dynamically reflow its children, you may have to wrap it in a gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow to enable that.
The children of a gtk.flow_box.FlowBox can be dynamically sorted and filtered.
Although a gtk.flow_box.FlowBox must have only gtk.flow_box_child.FlowBoxChild children, you can add any kind of widget to it via gtk.flow_box.FlowBox.insert, and a gtk.flow_box_child.FlowBoxChild widget will automatically be inserted between the box and the widget.
Also see gtk.list_box.ListBox.
CSS nodes
flowbox
├── flowboxchild
│ ╰── <child>
├── flowboxchild
│ ╰── <child>
┊
╰── [rubberband]gtk.flow_box.FlowBox uses a single CSS node with name flowbox. gtk.flow_box_child.FlowBoxChild uses a single CSS node with name flowboxchild. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
Accessibility
gtk.flow_box.FlowBox uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Grid role, and gtk.flow_box_child.FlowBoxChild uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.GridCell role.
gtk.flow_box_child.FlowBoxChild is the kind of widget that can be added to a gtk.flow_box.FlowBox.
GtkWidget parentInstanceThe gtk.font_button.FontButton allows to open a font chooser dialog to change the font.
It is suitable widget for selecting a font in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
fontbutton
╰── button.font
╰── [content]gtk.font_button.FontButton has a single CSS node with name fontbutton which contains a button node with the .font style class.
Deprecated
gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser is an interface that can be implemented by widgets for choosing fonts.
In GTK, the main objects that implement this interface are gtk.font_chooser_widget.FontChooserWidget, gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog and gtk.font_button.FontButton.
Deprecated
The gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog widget is a dialog for selecting a font.
!An example GtkFontChooserDialog
gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog implements the gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser interface and does not provide much API of its own.
To create a gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog, use gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog.new_.
GtkFontChooserDialog as GtkBuildable
The gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface exposes the buttons with the names “select_button” and “cancel_button”.
CSS nodes
gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .fontchooser.
Deprecated
GTypeInterface baseIfacePangoFontFamily * function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontFamilyPangoFontFace * function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontFaceint function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontSizevoid function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser, GtkFontFilterFunc filter, void * userData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setFilterFuncvoid function(GtkFontChooser * chooser, const(char) * fontname) fontActivatedvoid function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser, PangoFontMap * fontmap) setFontMapPangoFontMap * function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontMapvoid *[10] paddingThe gtk.font_chooser_widget.FontChooserWidget widget lets the user select a font.
It is used in the gtk.font_chooser_dialog.FontChooserDialog widget to provide a dialog for selecting fonts.
To set the font which is initially selected, use gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.setFont or gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.setFontDesc.
To get the selected font use gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.getFont or gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.getFontDesc.
To change the text which is shown in the preview area, use gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.setPreviewText.
CSS nodes
gtk.font_chooser_widget.FontChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name fontchooser.
Deprecated
A gtk.font_dialog.FontDialog object collects the arguments that are needed to present a font chooser dialog to the user, such as a title for the dialog and whether it should be modal.
The dialog is shown with the gtk.font_dialog.FontDialog.chooseFont function or its variants. This API follows the GIO async pattern, and the result can be obtained by calling the corresponding finish function, such as gtk.font_dialog.FontDialog.chooseFontFinish.
See gtk.font_dialog_button.FontDialogButton for a convenient control that uses gtk.font_dialog.FontDialog and presents the results.
The gtk.font_dialog_button.FontDialogButton is wrapped around a gtk.font_dialog.FontDialog and allows to open a font chooser dialog to change the font.
!An example GtkFontDialogButton
It is suitable widget for selecting a font in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
fontbutton
╰── button.font
╰── [content]gtk.font_dialog_button.FontDialogButton has a single CSS node with name fontbutton which contains a button node with the .font style class.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassGObjectClass parentClassgtk.frame.Frame is a widget that surrounds its child with a decorative frame and an optional label.
If present, the label is drawn inside the top edge of the frame. The horizontal position of the label can be controlled with gtk.frame.Frame.setLabelAlign.
gtk.frame.Frame clips its child. You can use this to add rounded corners to widgets, but be aware that it also cuts off shadows.
GtkFrame as GtkBuildable
The gtk.frame.Frame implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.
An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkFrame:
<object class="GtkFrame">
<child type="label">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="frame_label"/>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkEntry" id="frame_content"/>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
frame
├── <label widget>
╰── <child>gtk.frame.Frame has a main CSS node with name “frame”, which is used to draw the visible border. You can set the appearance of the border using CSS properties like “border-style” on this node.
Accessibility
gtk.frame.Frame uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkFrame * frame, GtkAllocation * allocation) computeChildAllocationvoid *[8] paddinggtk.glarea.GLArea is a widget that allows drawing with OpenGL.
gtk.glarea.GLArea sets up its own gdk.glcontext.GLContext, and creates a custom GL framebuffer that the widget will do GL rendering onto. It also ensures that this framebuffer is the default GL rendering target when rendering. The completed rendering is integrated into the larger GTK scene graph as a texture.
In order to draw, you have to connect to the gtk.glarea.GLArea.render signal, or subclass gtk.glarea.GLArea and override the GtkGLAreaClass.render virtual function.
The gtk.glarea.GLArea widget ensures that the gdk.glcontext.GLContext is associated with the widget's drawing area, and it is kept updated when the size and position of the drawing area changes.
Drawing with GtkGLArea
The simplest way to draw using OpenGL commands in a gtk.glarea.GLArea is to create a widget instance and connect to the gtk.glarea.GLArea.render signal:
The render() function will be called when the gtk.glarea.GLArea is ready for you to draw its content:
The initial contents of the framebuffer are transparent.
static gboolean
render (GtkGLArea *area, GdkGLContext *context)
{
// inside this function it's safe to use GL; the given
// GdkGLContext has been made current to the drawable
// surface used by the `GtkGLArea` and the viewport has
// already been set to be the size of the allocation
// we can start by clearing the buffer
glClearColor (0, 0, 0, 0);
glClear (GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT);
// draw your object
// draw_an_object ();
// we completed our drawing; the draw commands will be
// flushed at the end of the signal emission chain, and
// the buffers will be drawn on the window
return TRUE;
}
void setup_glarea (void)
{
// create a GtkGLArea instance
GtkWidget *gl_area = gtk_gl_area_new ();
// connect to the "render" signal
g_signal_connect (gl_area, "render", G_CALLBACK (render), NULL);
}If you need to initialize OpenGL state, e.g. buffer objects or shaders, you should use the gtk.widget.Widget.realize signal; you can use the gtk.widget.Widget.unrealize signal to clean up. Since the gdk.glcontext.GLContext creation and initialization may fail, you will need to check for errors, using gtk.glarea.GLArea.getError.
An example of how to safely initialize the GL state is:
static void
on_realize (GtkGLarea *area)
{
// We need to make the context current if we want to
// call GL API
gtk_gl_area_make_current (area);
// If there were errors during the initialization or
// when trying to make the context current, this
// function will return a GError for you to catch
if (gtk_gl_area_get_error (area) != NULL)
return;
// You can also use gtk_gl_area_set_error() in order
// to show eventual initialization errors on the
// GtkGLArea widget itself
GError *internal_error = NULL;
init_buffer_objects (&error);
if (error != NULL)
{
gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
g_error_free (error);
return;
}
init_shaders (&error);
if (error != NULL)
{
gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
g_error_free (error);
return;
}
}If you need to change the options for creating the gdk.glcontext.GLContext you should use the gtk.glarea.GLArea.createContext signal.
GtkWidget parentInstanceThe gtk.glarea_class.GLAreaClass structure contains only private data.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkGLArea * area, GdkGLContext * context) renderclass closure for the `GtkGLArea::render` signalvoid function(GtkGLArea * area, int width, int height) resizeclass closeure for the `GtkGLArea::resize` signalGdkGLContext * function(GtkGLArea * area) createContextclass closure for the `GtkGLArea::create-context` signalvoid *[8] Paddinggtk.gesture.Gesture is the base class for gesture recognition.
Although gtk.gesture.Gesture is quite generalized to serve as a base for multi-touch gestures, it is suitable to implement single-touch and pointer-based gestures (using the special null gdk.event_sequence.EventSequence value for these).
The number of touches that a gtk.gesture.Gesture need to be recognized is controlled by the gtk.gesture.Gesture.nPoints property, if a gesture is keeping track of less or more than that number of sequences, it won't check whether the gesture is recognized.
As soon as the gesture has the expected number of touches, it will check regularly if it is recognized, the criteria to consider a gesture as "recognized" is left to gtk.gesture.Gesture subclasses.
A recognized gesture will then emit the following signals:
- gtk.gesture.Gesture.begin when the gesture is recognized.
- gtk.gesture.Gesture.update, whenever an input event is processed.
- gtk.gesture.Gesture.end when the gesture is no longer recognized.
Event propagation
In order to receive events, a gesture needs to set a propagation phase through gtk.event_controller.EventController.setPropagationPhase.
In the capture phase, events are propagated from the toplevel down to the target widget, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with the event before it reaches the target.
In the bubble phase, events are propagated up from the target widget to the toplevel, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with events that have not been handled yet.
States of a sequence
Whenever input interaction happens, a single event may trigger a cascade of gtk.gesture.Gestures, both across the parents of the widget receiving the event and in parallel within an individual widget. It is a responsibility of the widgets using those gestures to set the state of touch sequences accordingly in order to enable cooperation of gestures around the gdk.event_sequence.EventSequences triggering those.
Within a widget, gestures can be grouped through gtk.gesture.Gesture.group. Grouped gestures synchronize the state of sequences, so calling gtk.gesture.Gesture.setState on one will effectively propagate the state throughout the group.
By default, all sequences start out in the gtk.types.EventSequenceState.None state, sequences in this state trigger the gesture event handler, but event propagation will continue unstopped by gestures.
If a sequence enters into the gtk.types.EventSequenceState.Denied state, the gesture group will effectively ignore the sequence, letting events go unstopped through the gesture, but the "slot" will still remain occupied while the touch is active.
If a sequence enters in the gtk.types.EventSequenceState.Claimed state, the gesture group will grab all interaction on the sequence, by:
- Setting the same sequence to gtk.types.EventSequenceState.Denied on every other gesture group within the widget, and every gesture on parent widgets in the propagation chain.
- Emitting gtk.gesture.Gesture.cancel on every gesture in widgets underneath in the propagation chain.
- Stopping event propagation after the gesture group handles the event.
Note
if a sequence is set early to gtk.types.EventSequenceState.Claimed on gdk.types.EventType.TouchBegin/gdk.types.EventType.ButtonPress (so those events are captured before reaching the event widget, this implies gtk.types.PropagationPhase.Capture), one similar event will be emulated if the sequence changes to gtk.types.EventSequenceState.Denied. This way event coherence is preserved before event propagation is unstopped again.Sequence states can't be changed freely. See gtk.gesture.Gesture.setState to know about the possible lifetimes of a gdk.event_sequence.EventSequence.
Touchpad gestures
On the platforms that support it, gtk.gesture.Gesture will handle transparently touchpad gesture events. The only precautions users of gtk.gesture.Gesture should do to enable this support are:
- If the gesture has gtk.types.PropagationPhase.None, ensuring events of type gdk.types.EventType.TouchpadSwipe and gdk.types.EventType.TouchpadPinch are handled by the gtk.gesture.Gesture
gtk.gesture_click.GestureClick is a gtk.gesture.Gesture implementation for clicks.
It is able to recognize multiple clicks on a nearby zone, which can be listened for through the gtk.gesture_click.GestureClick.pressed signal. Whenever time or distance between clicks exceed the GTK defaults, gtk.gesture_click.GestureClick.stopped is emitted, and the click counter is reset.
gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag is a gtk.gesture.Gesture implementation for drags.
The drag operation itself can be tracked throughout the gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag.dragBegin, gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag.dragUpdate and gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag.dragEnd signals, and the relevant coordinates can be extracted through gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag.getOffset and gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag.getStartPoint.
gtk.gesture_long_press.GestureLongPress is a gtk.gesture.Gesture for long presses.
This gesture is also known as “Press and Hold”.
When the timeout is exceeded, the gesture is triggering the gtk.gesture_long_press.GestureLongPress.pressed signal.
If the touchpoint is lifted before the timeout passes, or if it drifts too far of the initial press point, the gtk.gesture_long_press.GestureLongPress.cancelled signal will be emitted.
How long the timeout is before the ::pressed signal gets emitted is determined by the gtk.settings.Settings.gtkLongPressTime setting. It can be modified by the gtk.gesture_long_press.GestureLongPress.delayFactor property.
gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan is a gtk.gesture.Gesture for pan gestures.
These are drags that are locked to happen along one axis. The axis that a gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan handles is defined at construct time, and can be changed through gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan.setOrientation.
When the gesture starts to be recognized, gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan will attempt to determine as early as possible whether the sequence is moving in the expected direction, and denying the sequence if this does not happen.
Once a panning gesture along the expected axis is recognized, the gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan.pan signal will be emitted as input events are received, containing the offset in the given axis.
gtk.gesture_rotate.GestureRotate is a gtk.gesture.Gesture for 2-finger rotations.
Whenever the angle between both handled sequences changes, the gtk.gesture_rotate.GestureRotate.angleChanged signal is emitted.
gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle is a GtkGestures subclass optimized for singe-touch and mouse gestures.
Under interaction, these gestures stick to the first interacting sequence, which is accessible through gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.getCurrentSequence while the gesture is being interacted with.
By default gestures react to both gdk.types.BUTTON_PRIMARY and touch events. gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.setTouchOnly can be used to change the touch behavior. Callers may also specify a different mouse button number to interact with through gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.setButton, or react to any mouse button by setting it to 0. While the gesture is active, the button being currently pressed can be known through gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.getCurrentButton.
gtk.gesture_stylus.GestureStylus is a gtk.gesture.Gesture specific to stylus input.
The provided signals just relay the basic information of the stylus events.
gtk.gesture_swipe.GestureSwipe is a gtk.gesture.Gesture for swipe gestures.
After a press/move/.../move/release sequence happens, the gtk.gesture_swipe.GestureSwipe.swipe signal will be emitted, providing the velocity and directionality of the sequence at the time it was lifted.
If the velocity is desired in intermediate points, gtk.gesture_swipe.GestureSwipe.getVelocity can be called in a gtk.gesture.Gesture.update handler.
All velocities are reported in pixels/sec units.
gtk.gesture_zoom.GestureZoom is a gtk.gesture.Gesture for 2-finger pinch/zoom gestures.
Whenever the distance between both tracked sequences changes, the gtk.gesture_zoom.GestureZoom.scaleChanged signal is emitted to report the scale factor.
A widget that allows to bypass gsk rendering for its child by passing the content directly to the compositor.
Graphics offload is an optimization to reduce overhead and battery use that is most useful for video content. It only works on some platforms and in certain situations. GTK will automatically fall back to normal rendering if it doesn't.
Graphics offload is most efficient if there are no controls drawn on top of the video content.
You should consider using graphics offload for your main widget if it shows frequently changing content (such as a video, or a VM display) and you provide the content in the form of dmabuf textures (see gdk.dmabuf_texture_builder.DmabufTextureBuilder), in particular if it may be fullscreen.
Numerous factors can prohibit graphics offload:
- Unsupported platforms. Currently, graphics offload only works on Linux with Wayland.
- Clipping, such as rounded corners that cause the video content to not be rectangular
- Unsupported dmabuf formats (see gdk.display.Display.getDmabufFormats)
- Translucent video content (content with an alpha channel, even if it isn't used)
- Transforms that are more complex than translations and scales
- Filters such as opacity, grayscale or similar
To investigate problems related graphics offload, GTK offers debug flags to print out information about graphics offload and dmabuf use:
GDK_DEBUG=offload GDK_DEBUG=dmabuf
The GTK inspector provides a visual debugging tool for graphics offload.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgtk.grid.Grid is a container which arranges its child widgets in rows and columns.
It supports arbitrary positions and horizontal/vertical spans.
Children are added using gtk.grid.Grid.attach. They can span multiple rows or columns. It is also possible to add a child next to an existing child, using gtk.grid.Grid.attachNextTo. To remove a child from the grid, use gtk.grid.Grid.remove.
The behaviour of gtk.grid.Grid when several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.
GtkGrid as GtkBuildable
Every child in a gtk.grid.Grid has access to a custom gtk.buildable.Buildable element, called <layout>. It can by used to specify a position in the grid and optionally spans. All properties that can be used in the <layout> element are implemented by gtk.grid_layout_child.GridLayoutChild.
It is implemented by gtk.widget.Widget using gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager.
To showcase it, here is a simple example:
<object class="GtkGrid" id="my_grid">
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
<property name="label">Button 1</property>
<layout>
<property name="column">0</property>
<property name="row">0</property>
</layout>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="button2">
<property name="label">Button 2</property>
<layout>
<property name="column">1</property>
<property name="row">0</property>
</layout>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="button3">
<property name="label">Button 3</property>
<layout>
<property name="column">2</property>
<property name="row">0</property>
<property name="row-span">2</property>
</layout>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="button4">
<property name="label">Button 4</property>
<layout>
<property name="column">0</property>
<property name="row">1</property>
<property name="column-span">2</property>
</layout>
</object>
</child>
</object>It organizes the first two buttons side-by-side in one cell each. The third button is in the last column but spans across two rows. This is defined by the row-span property. The last button is located in the second row and spans across two columns, which is defined by the column-span property.
CSS nodes
gtk.grid.Grid uses a single CSS node with name grid.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.grid.Grid used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Starting from GTK 4.12, gtk.grid.Grid uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Generic role.
GtkWidget parentInstancegtk.grid_layout.GridLayout is a layout manager which arranges child widgets in rows and columns.
Children have an "attach point" defined by the horizontal and vertical index of the cell they occupy; children can span multiple rows or columns. The layout properties for setting the attach points and spans are set using the gtk.grid_layout_child.GridLayoutChild associated to each child widget.
The behaviour of gtk.grid_layout.GridLayout when several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.
gtk.grid_layout.GridLayout can be used like a gtk.box_layout.BoxLayout if all children are attached to the same row or column; however, if you only ever need a single row or column, you should consider using gtk.box_layout.BoxLayout.
gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild subclass for children in a gtk.grid_layout.GridLayout.
GtkLayoutChildClass parentClassGtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassgtk.grid_view.GridView presents a large dynamic grid of items.
gtk.grid_view.GridView uses its factory to generate one child widget for each visible item and shows them in a grid. The orientation of the grid view determines if the grid reflows vertically or horizontally.
gtk.grid_view.GridView allows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on _rubberband selection_, using gtk.grid_view.GridView.enableRubberband.
To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview.
CSS nodes
gridview
├── child[.activatable]
│
├── child[.activatable]
│
┊
╰── [rubberband]gtk.grid_view.GridView uses a single CSS node with name gridview. Each child uses a single CSS node with name child. If the gtk.list_item.ListItem.activatable property is set, the corresponding row will have the .activatable style class. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
Accessibility
gtk.grid_view.GridView uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Grid role, and the items use the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.GridCell role.
gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar is a widget for creating custom title bars for windows.
gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar is similar to a horizontal gtk.center_box.CenterBox. It allows children to be placed at the start or the end. In addition, it allows the window title to be displayed. The title will be centered with respect to the width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space.
gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar can add typical window frame controls, such as minimize, maximize and close buttons, or the window icon.
For these reasons, gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar is the natural choice for use as the custom titlebar widget of a gtk.window.Window (see gtk.window.Window.setTitlebar), as it gives features typical of titlebars while allowing the addition of child widgets.
GtkHeaderBar as GtkBuildable
The gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports adding children at the start or end sides by specifying “start” or “end” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element, or setting the title widget by specifying “title” value.
By default the gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar uses a gtk.label.Label displaying the title of the window it is contained in as the title widget, equivalent to the following UI definition:
<object class="GtkHeaderBar">
<property name="title-widget">
<object class="GtkLabel">
<property name="label" translatable="yes">Label</property>
<property name="single-line-mode">True</property>
<property name="ellipsize">end</property>
<property name="width-chars">5</property>
<style>
<class name="title"/>
</style>
</object>
</property>
</object>CSS nodes
headerbar
╰── windowhandle
╰── box
├── box.start
│ ├── windowcontrols.start
│ ╰── [other children]
├── [Title Widget]
╰── box.end
├── [other children]
╰── windowcontrols.endA gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar's CSS node is called headerbar. It contains a windowhandle subnode, which contains a box subnode, which contains two box subnodes at the start and end of the header bar, as well as a center node that represents the title.
Each of the boxes contains a windowcontrols subnode, see gtk.window_controls.WindowControls for details, as well as other children.
Accessibility
gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
gtk.imcontext.IMContext defines the interface for GTK input methods.
gtk.imcontext.IMContext is used by GTK text input widgets like gtk.text.Text to map from key events to Unicode character strings.
An input method may consume multiple key events in sequence before finally outputting the composed result. This is called preediting, and an input method may provide feedback about this process by displaying the intermediate composition states as preedit text. To do so, the gtk.imcontext.IMContext will emit gtk.imcontext.IMContext.preeditStart, gtk.imcontext.IMContext.preeditChanged and gtk.imcontext.IMContext.preeditEnd signals.
For instance, the built-in GTK input method gtk.imcontext_simple.IMContextSimple implements the input of arbitrary Unicode code points by holding down the <kbd>Control</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd> keys and then typing <kbd>u</kbd> followed by the hexadecimal digits of the code point. When releasing the <kbd>Control</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd> keys, preediting ends and the character is inserted as text. For example,
Ctrl+Shift+u 2 0 A C
results in the € sign.
Additional input methods can be made available for use by GTK widgets as loadable modules. An input method module is a small shared library which provides a gio.ioextension.IOExtension for the extension point named "gtk-im-module".
To connect a widget to the users preferred input method, you should use gtk.immulticontext.IMMulticontext.
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkIMContext * context) preeditStartDefault handler of the [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.preeditStart] signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context) preeditEndDefault handler of the [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.preeditEnd] signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context) preeditChangedDefault handler of the [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.preeditChanged] signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context, const(char) * str) commitDefault handler of the [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.commit] signal.gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context) retrieveSurroundingDefault handler of the [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.retrieveSurrounding] signal.gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, int offset, int nChars) deleteSurroundingDefault handler of the [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.deleteSurrounding] signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context, GtkWidget * widget) setClientWidgetCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setClientWidget] when the input window where the entered text will appear changes. Override this to keep track of the current input window, for instance for the ...void function(GtkIMContext * context, char * * str, PangoAttrList * * attrs, int * cursorPos) getPreeditStringCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.getPreeditString] to retrieve the text currently being preedited for display at the cursor position. Any input method which composes complex characters or any ot...gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, GdkEvent * event) filterKeypressCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.filterKeypress] on every key press or release event. Every non-trivial input method needs to override this in order to implement the mapping from key events to t...void function(GtkIMContext * context) focusInCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.focusIn] when the input widget has gained focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.void function(GtkIMContext * context) focusOutCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.focusOut] when the input widget has lost focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.void function(GtkIMContext * context) resetCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.reset] to signal a change such as a change in cursor position. An input method that implements preediting should override this method to clear the preedit state ...void function(GtkIMContext * context, GdkRectangle * area) setCursorLocationCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setCursorLocation] to inform the input method of the current cursor location relative to the client window. May be overridden to implement the display of popup w...void function(GtkIMContext * context, gboolean usePreedit) setUsePreeditCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setUsePreedit] to control the use of the preedit string. Override this to display feedback by some other means if turned off.void function(GtkIMContext * context, const(char) * text, int len, int cursorIndex) setSurroundingCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setSurrounding] in response to [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.retrieveSurrounding] signal to update the input method’s idea of the context around the cursor. It is n...gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, char * * text, int * cursorIndex) getSurroundingCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.getSurrounding] to update the context around the cursor location. It is not necessary to override this method even with input methods which implement context-dep...void function(GtkIMContext * context, const(char) * text, int len, int cursorIndex, int anchorIndex) setSurroundingWithSelectionCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setSurroundingWithSelection] in response to the [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.retrieveSurrounding] signal to update the input method’s idea of the context around th...gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, char * * text, int * cursorIndex, int * anchorIndex) getSurroundingWithSelectionCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.getSurroundingWithSelection] to update the context around the cursor location. It is not necessary to override this method even with input methods which implemen...void function(GtkIMContext * context) activateOskgboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, GdkEvent * event) activateOskWithEventvoid function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4gtk.imcontext_simple.IMContextSimple is an input method supporting table-based input methods.
Compose sequences
gtk.imcontext_simple.IMContextSimple reads compose sequences from the first of the following files that is found: ~/.config/gtk-4.0/Compose, ~/.XCompose, /usr/share/X11/locale/$locale/Compose (for locales that have a nontrivial Compose file). A subset of the file syntax described in the Compose(5) manual page is supported. Additionally, include "%L" loads GTK’s built-in table of compose sequences rather than the locale-specific one from X11.
If none of these files is found, gtk.imcontext_simple.IMContextSimple uses a built-in table of compose sequences that is derived from the X11 Compose files.
Note that compose sequences typically start with the Compose_key, which is often not available as a dedicated key on keyboards. Keyboard layouts may map this keysym to other keys, such as the right Control key.
Unicode characters
gtk.imcontext_simple.IMContextSimple also supports numeric entry of Unicode characters by typing <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>u</kbd>, followed by a hexadecimal Unicode codepoint.
For example,
Ctrl-Shift-u 1 2 3 Enter
yields U+0123 LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH CEDILLA, i.e. ģ.
Dead keys
gtk.imcontext_simple.IMContextSimple supports dead keys. For example, typing
dead_acute a
yields U+00E! LATIN SMALL LETTER_A WITH ACUTE, i.e. á. Note that this depends on the keyboard layout including dead keys.
GtkIMContextClass parentClassgtk.immulticontext.IMMulticontext is an input method context supporting multiple, switchable input methods.
Text widgets such as gtk.text.Text or gtk.text_view.TextView use a GtkIMMultiContext to implement their im-module property for switching between different input methods.
GtkIMContextClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Contains information found when looking up an icon in gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme.
gtk.icon_paintable.IconPaintable implements gdk.paintable.Paintable.
gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme provides a facility for loading themed icons.
The main reason for using a name rather than simply providing a filename is to allow different icons to be used depending on what “icon theme” is selected by the user. The operation of icon themes on Linux and Unix follows the Icon Theme Specification There is a fallback icon theme, named hicolor, where applications should install their icons, but additional icon themes can be installed as operating system vendors and users choose.
In many cases, named themes are used indirectly, via gtk.image.Image rather than directly, but looking up icons directly is also simple. The gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme object acts as a database of all the icons in the current theme. You can create new gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme objects, but it’s much more efficient to use the standard icon theme of the gtk.widget.Widget so that the icon information is shared with other people looking up icons.
GtkIconTheme *icon_theme;
GtkIconPaintable *icon;
GdkPaintable *paintable;
icon_theme = gtk_icon_theme_get_for_display (gtk_widget_get_display (my_widget));
icon = gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon (icon_theme,
"my-icon-name", // icon name
48, // icon size
1, // scale
0, // flags);
paintable = GDK_PAINTABLE (icon);
// Use the paintable
g_object_unref (icon);gtk.icon_view.IconView is a widget which displays data in a grid of icons.
gtk.icon_view.IconView provides an alternative view on a gtk.tree_model.TreeModel. It displays the model as a grid of icons with labels. Like gtk.tree_view.TreeView, it allows to select one or multiple items (depending on the selection mode, see gtk.icon_view.IconView.setSelectionMode). In addition to selection with the arrow keys, gtk.icon_view.IconView supports rubberband selection, which is controlled by dragging the pointer.
Note that if the tree model is backed by an actual tree store (as opposed to a flat list where the mapping to icons is obvious), gtk.icon_view.IconView will only display the first level of the tree and ignore the tree’s branches.
CSS nodes
iconview.view
╰── [rubberband]gtk.icon_view.IconView has a single CSS node with name iconview and style class .view. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
Deprecated
The gtk.image.Image widget displays an image.
Various kinds of object can be displayed as an image; most typically, you would load a gdk.texture.Texture from a file, using the convenience function gtk.image.Image.newFromFile, for instance:
GtkWidget *image = gtk_image_new_from_file ("myfile.png");If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the image will contain a “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers.
If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself, for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with gdk.texture.Texture.newFromFile, then create the gtk.image.Image with gtk.image.Image.newFromPaintable.
Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data files, such as image files. See the documentation of gio.resource.Resource inside GIO, for details. In this case, gtk.image.Image.resource, gtk.image.Image.newFromResource, and gtk.image.Image.setFromResource should be used.
gtk.image.Image displays its image as an icon, with a size that is determined by the application. See gtk.picture.Picture if you want to show an image at is actual size.
CSS nodes
gtk.image.Image has a single CSS node with the name image. The style classes .normal-icons or .large-icons may appear, depending on the gtk.image.Image.iconSize property.
Accessibility
gtk.image.Image uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Img role.
gtk.info_bar.InfoBar can be used to show messages to the user without a dialog.
It is often temporarily shown at the top or bottom of a document. In contrast to gtk.dialog.Dialog, which has an action area at the bottom, gtk.info_bar.InfoBar has an action area at the side.
The API of gtk.info_bar.InfoBar is very similar to gtk.dialog.Dialog, allowing you to add buttons to the action area with gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.addButton or gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.newWithButtons. The sensitivity of action widgets can be controlled with gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.setResponseSensitive.
To add widgets to the main content area of a gtk.info_bar.InfoBar, use gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.addChild.
Similar to gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog, the contents of a gtk.info_bar.InfoBar can by classified as error message, warning, informational message, etc, by using gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.setMessageType. GTK may use the message type to determine how the message is displayed.
A simple example for using a gtk.info_bar.InfoBar:
GtkWidget *message_label;
GtkWidget *widget;
GtkWidget *grid;
GtkInfoBar *bar;
// set up info bar
widget = gtk_info_bar_new ();
bar = GTK_INFO_BAR (widget);
grid = gtk_grid_new ();
message_label = gtk_label_new ("");
gtk_info_bar_add_child (bar, message_label);
gtk_info_bar_add_button (bar,
_("_OK"),
GTK_RESPONSE_OK);
g_signal_connect (bar,
"response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_hide),
NULL);
gtk_grid_attach (GTK_GRID (grid),
widget,
0, 2, 1, 1);
// ...
// show an error message
gtk_label_set_text (GTK_LABEL (message_label), "An error occurred!");
gtk_info_bar_set_message_type (bar, GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR);
gtk_widget_show (bar);GtkInfoBar as GtkBuildable
gtk.info_bar.InfoBar supports a custom <action-widgets> element, which can contain multiple <action-widget> elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogs @action_area).
gtk.info_bar.InfoBar supports adding action widgets by specifying “action” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. The widget will be added either to the action area. The response id has to be associated with the action widget using the <action-widgets> element.
CSS nodes
gtk.info_bar.InfoBar has a single CSS node with name infobar. The node may get one of the style classes .info, .warning, .error or .question, depending on the message type. If the info bar shows a close button, that button will have the .close style class applied.
Deprecated
you can use gtk.revealer.Revealer with a gtk.box.Box containing a gtk.label.Label and an optional gtk.button.Button, according to your application's design.
gtk.inscription.Inscription is a widget to show text in a predefined area.
You likely want to use gtk.label.Label instead as this widget is intended only for a small subset of use cases. The main scenario envisaged is inside lists such as gtk.column_view.ColumnView.
While a gtk.label.Label sizes itself depending on the text that is displayed, gtk.inscription.Inscription is given a size and inscribes the given text into that space as well as it can.
Users of this widget should take care to plan behaviour for the common case where the text doesn't fit exactly in the allocated space.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassA gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger that triggers when a specific keyval and modifiers are pressed.
The gtk.label.Label widget displays a small amount of text.
As the name implies, most labels are used to label another widget such as a gtk.button.Button.
CSS nodes
label
├── [selection]
├── [link]
┊
╰── [link]gtk.label.Label has a single CSS node with the name label. A wide variety of style classes may be applied to labels, such as .title, .subtitle, .dim-label, etc. In the gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow, labels are used with the .keycap style class.
If the label has a selection, it gets a subnode with name selection.
If the label has links, there is one subnode per link. These subnodes carry the link or visited state depending on whether they have been visited. In this case, label node also gets a .link style class.
GtkLabel as GtkBuildable
The GtkLabel implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <attributes> element, which supports any number of <attribute> elements. The <attribute> element has attributes named “name“, “value“, “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specify pango.attribute.Attribute values for this label.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes:
<object class="GtkLabel">
<attributes>
<attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/>
<attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/>
</attributes>
</object>The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable content instead.
Accessibility
gtk.label.Label uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Label role.
Mnemonics
Labels may contain “mnemonics”. Mnemonics are underlined characters in the label, used for keyboard navigation. Mnemonics are created by providing a string with an underscore before the mnemonic character, such as "_File", to the functions gtk.label.Label.newWithMnemonic or gtk.label.Label.setTextWithMnemonic.
Mnemonics automatically activate any activatable widget the label is inside, such as a gtk.button.Button; if the label is not inside the mnemonic’s target widget, you have to tell the label about the target using gtk.label.Label.setMnemonicWidget.
Here’s a simple example where the label is inside a button:
// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new ();
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
gtk_button_set_child (GTK_BUTTON (button), label);There’s a convenience function to create buttons with a mnemonic label already inside:
// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");To create a mnemonic for a widget alongside the label, such as a gtk.entry.Entry, you have to point the label at the entry with gtk.label.Label.setMnemonicWidget:
// Pressing Alt+H will focus the entry
GtkWidget *entry = gtk_entry_new ();
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget (GTK_LABEL (label), entry);Markup (styled text)
To make it easy to format text in a label (changing colors, fonts, etc.), label text can be provided in a simple markup format:
Here’s how to create a label with a small font:
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), "<small>Small text</small>");(See the Pango manual for complete documentation] of available tags, func@Pango.parse_markup)
The markup passed to gtk.label.Label.setMarkup must be valid; for example, literal `<`, `>` and `&` characters must be escaped as <, >, and &. If you pass text obtained from the user, file, or a network to gtk.label.Label.setMarkup, you’ll want to escape it with func@GLib.markup_escape_text or func@GLib.markup_printf_escaped.
Markup strings are just a convenient way to set the pango.attr_list.AttrList on a label; gtk.label.Label.setAttributes may be a simpler way to set attributes in some cases. Be careful though; pango.attr_list.AttrList tends to cause internationalization problems, unless you’re applying attributes to the entire string (i.e. unless you set the range of each attribute to G_MAXINT))/ The reason is that specifying the start_index and end_index for a [pango/attribute.html#Attribute">0, G_MAXINT)). The reason is that specifying the start_index and end_index for a [pango.attribute.Attribute requires knowledge of the exact string being displayed, so translations will cause problems.
Selectable labels
Labels can be made selectable with gtk.label.Label.setSelectable. Selectable labels allow the user to copy the label contents to the clipboard. Only labels that contain useful-to-copy information—such as error messages—should be made selectable.
Text layout
A label can contain any number of paragraphs, but will have performance problems if it contains more than a small number. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separators understood by Pango.
Labels can automatically wrap text if you call gtk.label.Label.setWrap.
gtk.label.Label.setJustify sets how the lines in a label align with one another. If you want to set how the label as a whole aligns in its available space, see the gtk.widget.Widget.halign and gtk.widget.Widget.valign properties.
The gtk.label.Label.widthChars and gtk.label.Label.maxWidthChars properties can be used to control the size allocation of ellipsized or wrapped labels. For ellipsizing labels, if either is specified (and less than the actual text size), it is used as the minimum width, and the actual text size is used as the natural width of the label. For wrapping labels, width-chars is used as the minimum width, if specified, and max-width-chars is used as the natural width. Even if max-width-chars specified, wrapping labels will be rewrapped to use all of the available width.
Links
GTK supports markup for clickable hyperlinks in addition to regular Pango markup. The markup for links is borrowed from HTML, using the <a> with “href“, “title“ and “class“ attributes. GTK renders links similar to the way they appear in web browsers, with colored, underlined text. The “title“ attribute is displayed as a tooltip on the link. The “class“ attribute is used as style class on the CSS node for the link.
An example of inline links looks like this:
const char *text =
"Go to the "
"<a href=\"https://www.gtk.org\" title=\"<i>Our</i> website\">"
"GTK website</a> for more...";
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), text);It is possible to implement custom handling for links and their tooltips with the gtk.label.Label.activateLink signal and the gtk.label.Label.getCurrentUri function.
gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild is the base class for objects that are meant to hold layout properties.
If a gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager has per-child properties, like their packing type, or the horizontal and vertical span, or the icon name, then the layout manager should use a gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild implementation to store those properties.
A gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild instance is only ever valid while a widget is part of a layout.
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassLayout managers are delegate classes that handle the preferred size and the allocation of a widget.
You typically subclass gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager if you want to implement a layout policy for the children of a widget, or if you want to determine the size of a widget depending on its contents.
Each gtk.widget.Widget can only have a gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager instance associated to it at any given time; it is possible, though, to replace the layout manager instance using gtk.widget.Widget.setLayoutManager.
Layout properties
A layout manager can expose properties for controlling the layout of each child, by creating an object type derived from gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild and installing the properties on it as normal gobject.object.ObjectWrap properties.
Each gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild instance storing the layout properties for a specific child is created through the gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager.getLayoutChild method; a gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager controls the creation of its gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild instances by overriding the GtkLayoutManagerClass.create_layout_child() virtual function. The typical implementation should look like:
static GtkLayoutChild *
create_layout_child (GtkLayoutManager *manager,
GtkWidget *container,
GtkWidget *child)
{
return g_object_new (your_layout_child_get_type (),
"layout-manager", manager,
"child-widget", child,
NULL);
}The gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild.layoutManager and gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild.childWidget properties on the newly created gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild instance are mandatory. The gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager will cache the newly created gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild instance until the widget is removed from its parent, or the parent removes the layout manager.
Each gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager instance creating a gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild should use gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager.getLayoutChild every time it needs to query the layout properties; each gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild instance should call gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager.layoutChanged every time a property is updated, in order to queue a new size measuring and allocation.
GObject parentInstanceThe gtk.layout_manager_class.LayoutManagerClass structure contains only private data, and should only be accessed through the provided API, or when subclassing gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager.
GObjectClass parentClassGtkSizeRequestMode function(GtkLayoutManager * manager, GtkWidget * widget) getRequestModea virtual function, used to return the preferred request mode for the layout manager; for instance, "width for height" or "height for width"; see [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode]void function(GtkLayoutManager * manager, GtkWidget * widget, GtkOrientation orientation, int forSize, int * minimum, int * natural, int * minimumBaseline, int * naturalBaseline) measurea virtual function, used to measure the minimum and preferred sizes of the widget using the layout manager for a given orientationvoid function(GtkLayoutManager * manager, GtkWidget * widget, int width, int height, int baseline) allocatea virtual function, used to allocate the size of the widget using the layout managerGType layoutChildTypethe type of [gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild] used by this layout managerGtkLayoutChild * function(GtkLayoutManager * manager, GtkWidget * widget, GtkWidget * forChild) createLayoutChilda virtual function, used to create a [gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild] meta object for the layout propertiesvoid function(GtkLayoutManager * manager) roota virtual function, called when the widget using the layout manager is attached to a [gtk.root.Root]void function(GtkLayoutManager * manager) unroota virtual function, called when the widget using the layout manager is detached from a [gtk.root.Root]void *[16] Paddinggtk.level_bar.LevelBar is a widget that can be used as a level indicator.
Typical use cases are displaying the strength of a password, or showing the charge level of a battery.
Use gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.setValue to set the current value, and gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.addOffsetValue to set the value offsets at which the bar will be considered in a different state. GTK will add a few offsets by default on the level bar: gtk.types.LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW, gtk.types.LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGH and gtk.types.LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL, with values 0.25, 0.75 and 1.0 respectively.
Note that it is your responsibility to update preexisting offsets when changing the minimum or maximum value. GTK will simply clamp them to the new range.
Adding a custom offset on the bar
static GtkWidget *
create_level_bar (void)
{
GtkWidget *widget;
GtkLevelBar *bar;
widget = gtk_level_bar_new ();
bar = GTK_LEVEL_BAR (widget);
// This changes the value of the default low offset
gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar,
GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW,
0.10);
// This adds a new offset to the bar; the application will
// be able to change its color CSS like this:
//
// levelbar block.my-offset {
// background-color: magenta;
// border-style: solid;
// border-color: black;
// border-width: 1px;
// }
gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar, "my-offset", 0.60);
return widget;
}The default interval of values is between zero and one, but it’s possible to modify the interval using gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.setMinValue and gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.setMaxValue. The value will be always drawn in proportion to the admissible interval, i.e. a value of 15 with a specified interval between 10 and 20 is equivalent to a value of 0.5 with an interval between 0 and 1. When gtk.types.LevelBarMode.Discrete is used, the bar level is rendered as a finite number of separated blocks instead of a single one. The number of blocks that will be rendered is equal to the number of units specified by the admissible interval.
For instance, to build a bar rendered with five blocks, it’s sufficient to set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum value to 5 after changing the indicator mode to discrete.
GtkLevelBar as GtkBuildable
The gtk.level_bar.LevelBar implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports a custom <offsets> element, which can contain any number of <offset> elements, each of which must have "name" and "value" attributes.
CSS nodes
levelbar[.discrete]
╰── trough
├── block.filled.level-name
┊
├── block.empty
┊gtk.level_bar.LevelBar has a main CSS node with name levelbar and one of the style classes .discrete or .continuous and a subnode with name trough. Below the trough node are a number of nodes with name block and style class .filled or .empty. In continuous mode, there is exactly one node of each, in discrete mode, the number of filled and unfilled nodes corresponds to blocks that are drawn. The block.filled nodes also get a style class .level-name corresponding to the level for the current value.
In horizontal orientation, the nodes are always arranged from left to right, regardless of text direction.
Accessibility
gtk.level_bar.LevelBar uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Meter role.
A gtk.link_button.LinkButton is a button with a hyperlink.
It is useful to show quick links to resources.
A link button is created by calling either gtk.link_button.LinkButton.new_ or gtk.link_button.LinkButton.newWithLabel. If using the former, the URI you pass to the constructor is used as a label for the widget.
The URI bound to a gtk.link_button.LinkButton can be set specifically using gtk.link_button.LinkButton.setUri.
By default, gtk.link_button.LinkButton calls gtk.file_launcher.FileLauncher.launch when the button is clicked. This behaviour can be overridden by connecting to the gtk.link_button.LinkButton.activateLink signal and returning true from the signal handler.
CSS nodes
gtk.link_button.LinkButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain gtk.button.Button, it gets the .link style class.
Accessibility
gtk.link_button.LinkButton uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Link role.
gtk.list_base.ListBase is the abstract base class for GTK's list widgets.
gtk.list_box.ListBox is a vertical list.
A gtk.list_box.ListBox only contains gtk.list_box_row.ListBoxRow children. These rows can by dynamically sorted and filtered, and headers can be added dynamically depending on the row content. It also allows keyboard and mouse navigation and selection like a typical list.
Using gtk.list_box.ListBox is often an alternative to gtk.tree_view.TreeView, especially when the list contents has a more complicated layout than what is allowed by a gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer, or when the contents is interactive (i.e. has a button in it).
Although a gtk.list_box.ListBox must have only gtk.list_box_row.ListBoxRow children, you can add any kind of widget to it via gtk.list_box.ListBox.prepend, gtk.list_box.ListBox.append and gtk.list_box.ListBox.insert and a gtk.list_box_row.ListBoxRow widget will automatically be inserted between the list and the widget.
GtkListBoxRows can be marked as activatable or selectable. If a row is activatable, gtk.list_box.ListBox.rowActivated will be emitted for it when the user tries to activate it. If it is selectable, the row will be marked as selected when the user tries to select it.
GtkListBox as GtkBuildable
The gtk.list_box.ListBox implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports setting a child as the placeholder by specifying “placeholder” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. See gtk.list_box.ListBox.setPlaceholder for info.
CSS nodes
list[.separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar][.boxed-list]
╰── row[.activatable]gtk.list_box.ListBox uses a single CSS node named list. It may carry the .separators style class, when the gtk.list_box.ListBox.showSeparators property is set. Each gtk.list_box_row.ListBoxRow uses a single CSS node named row. The row nodes get the .activatable style class added when appropriate.
It may also carry the .boxed-list style class. In this case, the list will be automatically surrounded by a frame and have separators.
The main list node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation: .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.
Accessibility
gtk.list_box.ListBox uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.List role and gtk.list_box_row.ListBoxRow uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ListItem role.
gtk.list_box_row.ListBoxRow is the kind of widget that can be added to a gtk.list_box.ListBox.
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkListBoxRow * row) activatevoid *[8] paddinggtk.list_header.ListHeader is used by list widgets to represent the headers they display.
gtk.list_header.ListHeader objects are managed just like gtk.list_item.ListItem objects via their factory, but provide a different set of properties suitable for managing the header instead of individual items.
gtk.list_item.ListItem is used by list widgets to represent items in a gio.list_model.ListModel.
gtk.list_item.ListItem objects are managed by the list widget (with its factory) and cannot be created by applications, but they need to be populated by application code. This is done by calling gtk.list_item.ListItem.setChild.
gtk.list_item.ListItem objects exist in 2 stages:
- The unbound stage where the listitem is not currently connected to an item in the list. In that case, the gtk.list_item.ListItem.item property is set to null.
- The bound stage where the listitem references an item from the list. The gtk.list_item.ListItem.item property is not null.
A gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory creates widgets for the items taken from a gio.list_model.ListModel.
This is one of the core concepts of handling list widgets such as gtk.list_view.ListView or gtk.grid_view.GridView.
The gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory is tasked with creating widgets for items taken from the model when the views need them and updating them as the items displayed by the view change.
A view is usually only able to display anything after both a factory and a model have been set on the view. So it is important that you do not skip this step when setting up your first view.
Because views do not display the whole list at once but only a few items, they only need to maintain a few widgets at a time. They will instruct the gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory to create these widgets and bind them to the items that are currently displayed.
As the list model changes or the user scrolls to the list, the items will change and the view will instruct the factory to bind the widgets to those new items.
The actual widgets used for displaying those widgets is provided by you.
When the factory needs widgets created, it will create a gtk.list_item.ListItem and hand it to your code to set up a widget for. This list item will provide various properties with information about what item to display and provide you with some opportunities to configure its behavior. See the gtk.list_item.ListItem documentation for further details.
Various implementations of gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory exist to allow you different ways to provide those widgets. The most common implementations are gtk.builder_list_item_factory.BuilderListItemFactory which takes a gtk.builder.Builder .ui file and then creates widgets and manages everything automatically from the information in that file and gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory which allows you to connect to signals with your own code and retain full control over how the widgets are setup and managed.
A gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory is supposed to be final - that means its behavior should not change and the first widget created from it should behave the same way as the last widget created from it. If you intend to do changes to the behavior, it is recommended that you create a new gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory which will allow the views to recreate its widgets.
Once you have chosen your factory and created it, you need to set it on the view widget you want to use it with, such as via gtk.list_view.ListView.setFactory. Reusing factories across different views is allowed, but very uncommon.
A list-like data structure that can be used with the gtk.tree_view.TreeView.
The gtk.list_store.ListStore object is a list model for use with a gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget. It implements the gtk.tree_model.TreeModel interface, and consequentialy, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements the gtk.tree_sortable.TreeSortable interface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree drag and drop interfaces.
The gtk.list_store.ListStore can accept most GTypes as a column type, though it can’t accept all custom types. Internally, it will keep a copy of data passed in (such as a string or a boxed pointer). Columns that accept gobject.object.ObjectWraps are handled a little differently. The gtk.list_store.ListStore will keep a reference to the object instead of copying the value. As a result, if the object is modified, it is up to the application writer to call gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.rowChanged to emit the signal@Gtk.TreeModel::row_changed signal. This most commonly affects lists with gdk.texture.Textures stored.
An example for creating a simple list store:
enum {
COLUMN_STRING,
COLUMN_INT,
COLUMN_BOOLEAN,
N_COLUMNS
};
{
GtkListStore *list_store;
GtkTreePath *path;
GtkTreeIter iter;
int i;
list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS,
G_TYPE_STRING,
G_TYPE_INT,
G_TYPE_BOOLEAN);
for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
{
char *some_data;
some_data = get_some_data (i);
// Add a new row to the model
gtk_list_store_append (list_store, &iter);
gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter,
COLUMN_STRING, some_data,
COLUMN_INT, i,
COLUMN_BOOLEAN, FALSE,
-1);
// As the store will keep a copy of the string internally,
// we free some_data.
g_free (some_data);
}
// Modify a particular row
path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("4");
gtk_tree_model_get_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL (list_store),
&iter,
path);
gtk_tree_path_free (path);
gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter,
COLUMN_BOOLEAN, TRUE,
-1);
}gtk.list_store.ListStore is deprecated since GTK 4.10, and should not be used in newly written code. You should use gio.list_store.ListStore instead, and the various list models provided by GTK.
Performance Considerations
Internally, the gtk.list_store.ListStore was originally implemented with a linked list with a tail pointer. As a result, it was fast at data insertion and deletion, and not fast at random data access. The gtk.list_store.ListStore sets the gtk.types.TreeModelFlags.ItersPersist flag, which means that gtk.tree_iter.TreeIters can be cached while the row exists. Thus, if access to a particular row is needed often and your code is expected to run on older versions of GTK, it is worth keeping the iter around.
Atomic Operations
It is important to note that only the methods gtk.list_store.ListStore.insertWithValues and gtk.list_store.ListStore.insertWithValuesv are atomic, in the sense that the row is being appended to the store and the values filled in in a single operation with regard to gtk.tree_model.TreeModel signaling. In contrast, using e.g. gtk.list_store.ListStore.append and then gtk.list_store.ListStore.set will first create a row, which triggers the GtkTreeModel::row-inserted signal on gtk.list_store.ListStore. The row, however, is still empty, and any signal handler connecting to GtkTreeModel::row-inserted on this particular store should be prepared for the situation that the row might be empty. This is especially important if you are wrapping the gtk.list_store.ListStore inside a gtk.tree_model.TreeModelFilter and are using a gtk.tree_model.TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc. Using any of the non-atomic operations to append rows to the gtk.list_store.ListStore will cause the gtk.tree_model.TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc to be visited with an empty row first; the function must be prepared for that.
GtkListStore as GtkBuildable
The GtkListStore implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface allows to specify the model columns with a <columns> element that may contain multiple <column> elements, each specifying one model column. The “type” attribute specifies the data type for the column.
Additionally, it is possible to specify content for the list store in the UI definition, with the <data> element. It can contain multiple <row> elements, each specifying to content for one row of the list model. Inside a <row>, the <col> elements specify the content for individual cells.
Note that it is probably more common to define your models in the code, and one might consider it a layering violation to specify the content of a list store in a UI definition, data, not presentation, and common wisdom is to separate the two, as far as possible.
An example of a UI Definition fragment for a list store:
<object class="GtkListStore">
<columns>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gint"/>
</columns>
<data>
<row>
<col id="0">John</col>
<col id="1">Doe</col>
<col id="2">25</col>
</row>
<row>
<col id="0">Johan</col>
<col id="1">Dahlin</col>
<col id="2">50</col>
</row>
</data>
</object>Deprecated
gtk.list_view.ListView presents a large dynamic list of items.
gtk.list_view.ListView uses its factory to generate one row widget for each visible item and shows them in a linear display, either vertically or horizontally.
The gtk.list_view.ListView.showSeparators property offers a simple way to display separators between the rows.
gtk.list_view.ListView allows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on _rubberband selection_, using gtk.list_view.ListView.enableRubberband.
If you need multiple columns with headers, see gtk.column_view.ColumnView.
To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview.
An example of using gtk.list_view.ListView:
static void
setup_listitem_cb (GtkListItemFactory *factory,
GtkListItem *list_item)
{
GtkWidget *image;
image = gtk_image_new ();
gtk_image_set_icon_size (GTK_IMAGE (image), GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE);
gtk_list_item_set_child (list_item, image);
}
static void
bind_listitem_cb (GtkListItemFactory *factory,
GtkListItem *list_item)
{
GtkWidget *image;
GAppInfo *app_info;
image = gtk_list_item_get_child (list_item);
app_info = gtk_list_item_get_item (list_item);
gtk_image_set_from_gicon (GTK_IMAGE (image), g_app_info_get_icon (app_info));
}
static void
activate_cb (GtkListView *list,
guint position,
gpointer unused)
{
GAppInfo *app_info;
app_info = g_list_model_get_item (G_LIST_MODEL (gtk_list_view_get_model (list)), position);
g_app_info_launch (app_info, NULL, NULL, NULL);
g_object_unref (app_info);
}
...
model = create_application_list ();
factory = gtk_signal_list_item_factory_new ();
g_signal_connect (factory, "setup", G_CALLBACK (setup_listitem_cb), NULL);
g_signal_connect (factory, "bind", G_CALLBACK (bind_listitem_cb), NULL);
list = gtk_list_view_new (GTK_SELECTION_MODEL (gtk_single_selection_new (model)), factory);
g_signal_connect (list, "activate", G_CALLBACK (activate_cb), NULL);
gtk_scrolled_window_set_child (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (sw), list);CSS nodes
listview[.separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar][.data-table]
├── row[.activatable]
│
├── row[.activatable]
│
┊
╰── [rubberband]gtk.list_view.ListView uses a single CSS node named listview. It may carry the .separators style class, when gtk.list_view.ListView.showSeparators property is set. Each child widget uses a single CSS node named row. If the gtk.list_item.ListItem.activatable property is set, the corresponding row will have the .activatable style class. For rubberband selection, a node with name rubberband is used.
The main listview node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation: .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.
Accessibility
gtk.list_view.ListView uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.List role, and the list items use the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ListItem role.
gtk.lock_button.LockButton is a widget to obtain and revoke authorizations needed to operate the controls.
It is typically used in preference dialogs or control panels.
The required authorization is represented by a gio.permission.Permission object. Concrete implementations of gio.permission.Permission may use PolicyKit or some other authorization framework. To obtain a PolicyKit-based gio.permission.Permission, use polkit_permission_new().
If the user is not currently allowed to perform the action, but can obtain the permission, the widget looks like this:

and the user can click the button to request the permission. Depending on the platform, this may pop up an authentication dialog or ask the user to authenticate in some other way. Once the user has obtained the permission, the widget changes to this:

and the permission can be dropped again by clicking the button. If the user is not able to obtain the permission at all, the widget looks like this:

If the user has the permission and cannot drop it, the button is hidden.
The text (and tooltips) that are shown in the various cases can be adjusted with the gtk.lock_button.LockButton.textLock, gtk.lock_button.LockButton.textUnlock, gtk.lock_button.LockButton.tooltipLock, gtk.lock_button.LockButton.tooltipUnlock and gtk.lock_button.LockButton.tooltipNotAuthorized properties.
Deprecated
A gtk.map_list_model.MapListModel maps the items in a list model to different items.
gtk.map_list_model.MapListModel uses a gtk.types.MapListModelMapFunc.
Example: Create a list of GtkEventControllers
static gpointer
map_to_controllers (gpointer widget,
gpointer data)
{
gpointer result = gtk_widget_observe_controllers (widget);
g_object_unref (widget);
return result;
}
widgets = gtk_widget_observe_children (widget);
controllers = gtk_map_list_model_new (widgets,
map_to_controllers,
NULL, NULL);
model = gtk_flatten_list_model_new (GTK_TYPE_EVENT_CONTROLLER,
controllers);gtk.map_list_model.MapListModel will attempt to discard the mapped objects as soon as they are no longer needed and recreate them if necessary.
gtk.map_list_model.MapListModel passes through sections from the underlying model.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.media_controls.MediaControls is a widget to show controls for a video.
Usually, gtk.media_controls.MediaControls is used as part of gtk.video.Video.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgtk.media_file.MediaFile implements gtk.media_stream.MediaStream for files.
This provides a simple way to play back video files with GTK.
GTK provides a GIO extension point for gtk.media_file.MediaFile implementations to allow for external implementations using various media frameworks.
GTK itself includes an implementation using GStreamer.
GtkMediaStream parentInstanceGtkMediaStreamClass parentClassvoid function(GtkMediaFile * self) openvoid function(GtkMediaFile * self) closevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4gtk.media_stream.MediaStream is the integration point for media playback inside GTK.
GTK provides an implementation of the gtk.media_stream.MediaStream interface that is called gtk.media_file.MediaFile.
Apart from application-facing API for stream playback, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream has a number of APIs that are only useful for implementations and should not be used in applications: gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.prepared, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.unprepared, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.update, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.ended, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.seekSuccess, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.seekFailed, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.gerror, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.error, gtk.media_stream.MediaStream.errorValist.
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkMediaStream * self) playvoid function(GtkMediaStream * self) pausevoid function(GtkMediaStream * self, long timestamp) seekvoid function(GtkMediaStream * self, gboolean muted, double volume) updateAudiovoid function(GtkMediaStream * self, GdkSurface * surface) realizevoid function(GtkMediaStream * self, GdkSurface * surface) unrealizevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8The gtk.menu_button.MenuButton widget is used to display a popup when clicked.
This popup can be provided either as a gtk.popover.Popover or as an abstract gio.menu_model.MenuModel.
The gtk.menu_button.MenuButton widget can show either an icon (set with the gtk.menu_button.MenuButton.iconName property) or a label (set with the gtk.menu_button.MenuButton.label property). If neither is explicitly set, a gtk.image.Image is automatically created, using an arrow image oriented according to gtk.menu_button.MenuButton.direction or the generic “open-menu-symbolic” icon if the direction is not set.
The positioning of the popup is determined by the gtk.menu_button.MenuButton.direction property of the menu button.
For menus, the gtk.widget.Widget.halign and gtk.widget.Widget.valign properties of the menu are also taken into account. For example, when the direction is gtk.types.ArrowType.Down and the horizontal alignment is gtk.types.Align.Start, the menu will be positioned below the button, with the starting edge (depending on the text direction) of the menu aligned with the starting edge of the button. If there is not enough space below the button, the menu is popped up above the button instead. If the alignment would move part of the menu offscreen, it is “pushed in”.
| start | center | end | |
|---|---|---|---|
| down |  |  |  |
| up |  |  |  |
| left |  |  |  |
| right |  |  |  |
CSS nodes
menubutton
╰── button.toggle
╰── <content>
╰── [arrow]gtk.menu_button.MenuButton has a single CSS node with name menubutton which contains a button node with a .toggle style class.
If the button contains an icon, it will have the .image-button style class, if it contains text, it will have .text-button style class. If an arrow is visible in addition to an icon, text or a custom child, it will also have .arrow-button style class.
Inside the toggle button content, there is an arrow node for the indicator, which will carry one of the .none, .up, .down, .left or .right style classes to indicate the direction that the menu will appear in. The CSS is expected to provide a suitable image for each of these cases using the -gtk-icon-source property.
Optionally, the menubutton node can carry the .circular style class to request a round appearance.
Accessibility
gtk.menu_button.MenuButton uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Button role.
gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog presents a dialog with some message text.
It’s simply a convenience widget; you could construct the equivalent of gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog from gtk.dialog.Dialog without too much effort, but gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog saves typing.
The easiest way to do a modal message dialog is to use the gtk.types.DialogFlags.Modal flag, which will call gtk.window.Window.setModal internally. The dialog will prevent interaction with the parent window until it's hidden or destroyed. You can use the gtk.dialog.Dialog.response signal to know when the user dismissed the dialog.
An example for using a modal dialog:
GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT | GTK_DIALOG_MODAL;
dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
flags,
GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
"Error reading “%s”: %s",
filename,
g_strerror (errno));
// Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it
// (e.g. clicks a button)
g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy),
NULL);You might do a non-modal gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog simply by omitting the gtk.types.DialogFlags.Modal flag:
GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
flags,
GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
"Error reading “%s”: %s",
filename,
g_strerror (errno));
// Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it
// (e.g. clicks a button)
g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy),
NULL);GtkMessageDialog as GtkBuildable
The gtk.message_dialog.MessageDialog implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface exposes the message area as an internal child with the name “message_area”.
Deprecated
GtkDialog parentInstanceA gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger that triggers when a specific mnemonic is pressed.
Mnemonics require a mnemonic modifier (typically <kbd>Alt</kbd>) to be pressed together with the mnemonic key.
gtk.mount_operation.MountOperation is an implementation of gio.mount_operation.MountOperation.
The functions and objects described here make working with GTK and GIO more convenient.
gtk.mount_operation.MountOperation is needed when mounting volumes: It is an implementation of gio.mount_operation.MountOperation that can be used with GIO functions for mounting volumes such as gio.file.File.mountEnclosingVolume, gio.file.File.mountMountable, gio.volume.Volume.mount, gio.mount.Mount.unmountWithOperation and others.
When necessary, gtk.mount_operation.MountOperation shows dialogs to let the user enter passwords, ask questions or show processes blocking unmount.
GMountOperationClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4gtk.multi_filter.MultiFilter is the base class for filters that combine multiple filters.
gtk.multi_selection.MultiSelection is a gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel that allows selecting multiple elements.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.multi_sorter.MultiSorter combines multiple sorters by trying them in turn.
If the first sorter compares two items as equal, the second is tried next, and so on.
GtkSorterClass parentClassA gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction that activates an action by name.
gtk.native.Native is the interface implemented by all widgets that have their own gdk.surface.Surface.
The obvious example of a gtk.native.Native is gtk.window.Window.
Every widget that is not itself a gtk.native.Native is contained in one, and you can get it with gtk.widget.Widget.getNative.
To get the surface of a gtk.native.Native, use gtk.native.Native.getSurface. It is also possible to find the gtk.native.Native to which a surface belongs, with gtk.native.Native.getForSurface.
In addition to a gdk.surface.Surface, a gtk.native.Native also provides a gsk.renderer.Renderer for rendering on that surface. To get the renderer, use gtk.native.Native.getRenderer.
Native dialogs are platform dialogs that don't use gtk.dialog.Dialog.
They are used in order to integrate better with a platform, by looking the same as other native applications and supporting platform specific features.
The gtk.dialog.Dialog functions cannot be used on such objects, but we need a similar API in order to drive them. The gtk.native_dialog.NativeDialog object is an API that allows you to do this. It allows you to set various common properties on the dialog, as well as show and hide it and get a gtk.native_dialog.NativeDialog.response signal when the user finished with the dialog.
Note that unlike gtk.dialog.Dialog, gtk.native_dialog.NativeDialog objects are not toplevel widgets, and GTK does not keep them alive. It is your responsibility to keep a reference until you are done with the object.
GObject parentInstanceClass structure for gtk.native_dialog.NativeDialog.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkNativeDialog * self, int responseId) responseclass handler for the `GtkNativeDialog::response` signalvoid function(GtkNativeDialog * self) showvoid function(GtkNativeDialog * self) hidevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger that never triggers.
gtk.no_selection.NoSelection is a gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel that does not allow selecting anything.
This model is meant to be used as a simple wrapper around a gio.list_model.ListModel when a gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel is required.
gtk.no_selection.NoSelection passes through sections from the underlying model.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.notebook.Notebook is a container whose children are pages switched between using tabs.
There are many configuration options for gtk.notebook.Notebook. Among other things, you can choose on which edge the tabs appear (see gtk.notebook.Notebook.setTabPos), whether, if there are too many tabs to fit the notebook should be made bigger or scrolling arrows added (see gtk.notebook.Notebook.setScrollable), and whether there will be a popup menu allowing the users to switch pages. (see gtk.notebook.Notebook.popupEnable).
GtkNotebook as GtkBuildable
The gtk.notebook.Notebook implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports placing children into tabs by specifying “tab” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. Note that the content of the tab must be created before the tab can be filled. A tab child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.
To add a child widget in the notebooks action area, specify "action-start" or “action-end” as the “type” attribute of the <child> element.
An example of a UI definition fragment with gtk.notebook.Notebook:
<object class="GtkNotebook">
<child>
<object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-content">
<property name="label">Content</property>
</object>
</child>
<child type="tab">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-tab">
<property name="label">Tab</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
notebook
├── header.top
│ ├── [<action widget>]
│ ├── tabs
│ │ ├── [arrow]
│ │ ├── tab
│ │ │ ╰── <tab label>
┊ ┊ ┊
│ │ ├── tab[.reorderable-page]
│ │ │ ╰── <tab label>
│ │ ╰── [arrow]
│ ╰── [<action widget>]
│
╰── stack
├── <child>
┊
╰── <child>gtk.notebook.Notebook has a main CSS node with name notebook, a subnode with name header and below that a subnode with name tabs which contains one subnode per tab with name tab.
If action widgets are present, their CSS nodes are placed next to the tabs node. If the notebook is scrollable, CSS nodes with name arrow are placed as first and last child of the tabs node.
The main node gets the .frame style class when the notebook has a border (see gtk.notebook.Notebook.setShowBorder).
The header node gets one of the style class .top, .bottom, .left or .right, depending on where the tabs are placed. For reorderable pages, the tab node gets the .reorderable-page class.
A tab node gets the .dnd style class while it is moved with drag-and-drop.
The nodes are always arranged from left-to-right, regardless of text direction.
Accessibility
gtk.notebook.Notebook uses the following roles:
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group for the notebook widget
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TabList for the list of tabs
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Tab role for each tab
- gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TabPanel for each page
gtk.notebook_page.NotebookPage is an auxiliary object used by gtk.notebook.Notebook.
A gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction that does nothing.
gtk.numeric_sorter.NumericSorter is a gtk.sorter.Sorter that compares numbers.
To obtain the numbers to compare, this sorter evaluates a gtk.expression.Expression.
GtkSorterClass parentClassA gobject.object.ObjectWrap value in a gtk.expression.Expression.
The gtk.orientable.Orientable interface is implemented by all widgets that can be oriented horizontally or vertically.
gtk.orientable.Orientable is more flexible in that it allows the orientation to be changed at runtime, allowing the widgets to “flip”.
CSS nodes
gtk.widget.Widget types implementing the gtk.orientable.Orientable interface will automatically acquire the horizontal or vertical CSS class depending on the value of the gtk.orientable.Orientable.orientation property.
GTypeInterface baseIfacegtk.overlay.Overlay is a container which contains a single main child, on top of which it can place “overlay” widgets.
The position of each overlay widget is determined by its gtk.widget.Widget.halign and gtk.widget.Widget.valign properties. E.g. a widget with both alignments set to gtk.types.Align.Start will be placed at the top left corner of the gtk.overlay.Overlay container, whereas an overlay with halign set to gtk.types.Align.Center and valign set to gtk.types.Align.End will be placed a the bottom edge of the gtk.overlay.Overlay, horizontally centered. The position can be adjusted by setting the margin properties of the child to non-zero values.
More complicated placement of overlays is possible by connecting to the gtk.overlay.Overlay.getChildPosition signal.
An overlay’s minimum and natural sizes are those of its main child. The sizes of overlay children are not considered when measuring these preferred sizes.
GtkOverlay as GtkBuildable
The gtk.overlay.Overlay implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports placing a child as an overlay by specifying “overlay” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
CSS nodes
gtk.overlay.Overlay has a single CSS node with the name “overlay”. Overlay children whose alignments cause them to be positioned at an edge get the style classes “.left”, “.right”, “.top”, and/or “.bottom” according to their position.
gtk.overlay_layout.OverlayLayout is the layout manager used by gtk.overlay.Overlay.
It places widgets as overlays on top of the main child.
This is not a reusable layout manager, since it expects its widget to be a gtk.overlay.Overlay. It is only listed here so that its layout properties get documented.
gtk.layout_child.LayoutChild subclass for children in a gtk.overlay_layout.OverlayLayout.
GtkLayoutChildClass parentClassGtkLayoutManagerClass parentClassStruct defining a pad action entry.
GtkPadActionType typethe type of pad feature that will trigger this action entry.int indexthe 0-indexed button/ring/strip number that will trigger this action entry.int modethe mode that will trigger this action entry, or -1 for all modes.const(char) * labelHuman readable description of this action entry, this string should be deemed user-visible.const(char) * actionNameaction name that will be activated in the [gio.action_group.ActionGroup].gtk.pad_controller.PadController is an event controller for the pads found in drawing tablets.
Pads are the collection of buttons and tactile sensors often found around the stylus-sensitive area.
These buttons and sensors have no implicit meaning, and by default they perform no action. gtk.pad_controller.PadController is provided to map those to gio.action.Action objects, thus letting the application give them a more semantic meaning.
Buttons and sensors are not constrained to triggering a single action, some gdk.types.InputSource.TabletPad devices feature multiple "modes". All these input elements have one current mode, which may determine the final action being triggered.
Pad devices often divide buttons and sensors into groups. All elements in a group share the same current mode, but different groups may have different modes. See gdk.device_pad.DevicePad.getNGroups and gdk.device_pad.DevicePad.getGroupNModes.
Each of the actions that a given button/strip/ring performs for a given mode is defined by a gtk.pad_action_entry.PadActionEntry. It contains an action name that will be looked up in the given gio.action_group.ActionGroup and activated whenever the specified input element and mode are triggered.
A simple example of gtk.pad_controller.PadController usage: Assigning button 1 in all modes and pad devices to an "invert-selection" action:
GtkPadActionEntry *pad_actions[] = {
{ GTK_PAD_ACTION_BUTTON, 1, -1, "Invert selection", "pad-actions.invert-selection" },
…
};
…
action_group = g_simple_action_group_new ();
action = g_simple_action_new ("pad-actions.invert-selection", NULL);
g_signal_connect (action, "activate", on_invert_selection_activated, NULL);
g_action_map_add_action (G_ACTION_MAP (action_group), action);
…
pad_controller = gtk_pad_controller_new (action_group, NULL);The actions belonging to rings/strips will be activated with a parameter of type G_VARIANT_TYPE_DOUBLE bearing the value of the given axis, it is required that those are made stateful and accepting this glib.variant_type.VariantType.
A range of pages to print.
int startstart of page range.int endend of page range.A gtk.page_setup.PageSetup object stores the page size, orientation and margins.
The idea is that you can get one of these from the page setup dialog and then pass it to the gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation when printing. The benefit of splitting this out of the gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings is that these affect the actual layout of the page, and thus need to be set long before user prints.
Margins
The margins specified in this object are the “print margins”, i.e. the parts of the page that the printer cannot print on. These are different from the layout margins that a word processor uses; they are typically used to determine the minimal size for the layout margins.
To obtain a gtk.page_setup.PageSetup use gtk.page_setup.PageSetup.new_ to get the defaults, or use func@Gtk.print_run_page_setup_dialog to show the page setup dialog and receive the resulting page setup.
A page setup dialog
static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;
static GtkPageSetup *page_setup = NULL;
static void
do_page_setup (void)
{
GtkPageSetup *new_page_setup;
if (settings == NULL)
settings = gtk_print_settings_new ();
new_page_setup = gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog (GTK_WINDOW (main_window),
page_setup, settings);
if (page_setup)
g_object_unref (page_setup);
page_setup = new_page_setup;
}gtk.page_setup_unix_dialog.PageSetupUnixDialog implements a page setup dialog for platforms which don’t provide a native page setup dialog, like Unix.
!An example GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
It can be used very much like any other GTK dialog, at the cost of the portability offered by the high-level printing API in gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.
CSS nodes
gtk.page_setup_unix_dialog.PageSetupUnixDialog has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .pagesetup.
A widget with two panes, arranged either horizontally or vertically.
The division between the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging a handle.
Child widgets are added to the panes of the widget with gtk.paned.Paned.setStartChild and gtk.paned.Paned.setEndChild. The division between the two children is set by default from the size requests of the children, but it can be adjusted by the user.
A paned widget draws a separator between the two child widgets and a small handle that the user can drag to adjust the division. It does not draw any relief around the children or around the separator. (The space in which the separator is called the gutter.) Often, it is useful to put each child inside a gtk.frame.Frame so that the gutter appears as a ridge. No separator is drawn if one of the children is missing.
Each child has two options that can be set, "resize" and "shrink". If "resize" is true then, when the gtk.paned.Paned is resized, that child will expand or shrink along with the paned widget. If "shrink" is true, then that child can be made smaller than its requisition by the user. Setting "shrink" to false allows the application to set a minimum size. If "resize" is false for both children, then this is treated as if "resize" is true for both children.
The application can set the position of the slider as if it were set by the user, by calling gtk.paned.Paned.setPosition.
CSS nodes
paned
├── <child>
├── separator[.wide]
╰── <child>gtk.paned.Paned has a main CSS node with name paned, and a subnode for the separator with name separator. The subnode gets a .wide style class when the paned is supposed to be wide.
In horizontal orientation, the nodes are arranged based on the text direction, so in left-to-right mode, :first-child will select the leftmost child, while it will select the rightmost child in RTL layouts.
Creating a paned widget with minimum sizes.
GtkWidget *hpaned = gtk_paned_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
GtkWidget *frame1 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);
GtkWidget *frame2 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (hpaned, 200, -1);
gtk_paned_set_start_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame1);
gtk_paned_set_resize_start_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), TRUE);
gtk_paned_set_shrink_start_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame1, 50, -1);
gtk_paned_set_end_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame2);
gtk_paned_set_resize_end_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE);
gtk_paned_set_shrink_end_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame2, 50, -1);gtk.paper_size.PaperSize handles paper sizes.
It uses the standard called PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG: Standard for Media Standardized Names to name the paper sizes (and to get the data for the page sizes). In addition to standard paper sizes, gtk.paper_size.PaperSize allows to construct custom paper sizes with arbitrary dimensions.
The gtk.paper_size.PaperSize object stores not only the dimensions (width and height) of a paper size and its name, it also provides default print margins.
A gobject.param_spec.ParamSpec for properties holding a gtk.expression.Expression.
GParamSpec parentInstancegtk.password_entry.PasswordEntry is an entry that has been tailored for entering secrets.
It does not show its contents in clear text, does not allow to copy it to the clipboard, and it shows a warning when Caps Lock is engaged. If the underlying platform allows it, gtk.password_entry.PasswordEntry will also place the text in a non-pageable memory area, to avoid it being written out to disk by the operating system.
Optionally, it can offer a way to reveal the contents in clear text.
gtk.password_entry.PasswordEntry provides only minimal API and should be used with the gtk.editable.Editable API.
CSS Nodes
entry.password
╰── text
├── image.caps-lock-indicator
┊gtk.password_entry.PasswordEntry has a single CSS node with name entry that carries a .passwordstyle class. The text Css node below it has a child with name image and style class .caps-lock-indicator for the Caps Lock icon, and possibly other children.
Accessibility
gtk.password_entry.PasswordEntry uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TextBox role.
A gtk.entry_buffer.EntryBuffer that locks the underlying memory to prevent it from being swapped to disk.
gtk.password_entry.PasswordEntry uses a gtk.password_entry_buffer.PasswordEntryBuffer.
GtkEntryBufferClass parentClassThe gtk.picture.Picture widget displays a gdk.paintable.Paintable.
Many convenience functions are provided to make pictures simple to use. For example, if you want to load an image from a file, and then display it, there’s a convenience function to do this:
GtkWidget *widget = gtk_picture_new_for_filename ("myfile.png");If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the picture will contain a “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers. If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself, for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with gdk.texture.Texture.newFromFile, then create the gtk.picture.Picture with gtk.picture.Picture.newForPaintable.
Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data files, such as image files. See the documentation of gio.resource.Resource for details. In this case, gtk.picture.Picture.newForResource and gtk.picture.Picture.setResource should be used.
gtk.picture.Picture displays an image at its natural size. See gtk.image.Image if you want to display a fixed-size image, such as an icon.
Sizing the paintable
You can influence how the paintable is displayed inside the gtk.picture.Picture by changing gtk.picture.Picture.contentFit. See gtk.types.ContentFit for details. gtk.picture.Picture.canShrink can be unset to make sure that paintables are never made smaller than their ideal size - but be careful if you do not know the size of the paintable in use (like when displaying user-loaded images). This can easily cause the picture to grow larger than the screen. And gtk.widget.Widget.halign and gtk.widget.Widget.valign can be used to make sure the paintable doesn't fill all available space but is instead displayed at its original size.
CSS nodes
gtk.picture.Picture has a single CSS node with the name picture.
Accessibility
gtk.picture.Picture uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Img role.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgtk.popover.Popover is a bubble-like context popup.
It is primarily meant to provide context-dependent information or options. Popovers are attached to a parent widget. By default, they point to the whole widget area, although this behavior can be changed with gtk.popover.Popover.setPointingTo.
The position of a popover relative to the widget it is attached to can also be changed with gtk.popover.Popover.setPosition
By default, gtk.popover.Popover performs a grab, in order to ensure input events get redirected to it while it is shown, and also so the popover is dismissed in the expected situations (clicks outside the popover, or the Escape key being pressed). If no such modal behavior is desired on a popover, gtk.popover.Popover.setAutohide may be called on it to tweak its behavior.
GtkPopover as menu replacement
gtk.popover.Popover is often used to replace menus. The best was to do this is to use the gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu subclass which supports being populated from a gio.menu_model.MenuModel with gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu.newFromModel.
<section>
<attribute name="display-hint">horizontal-buttons</attribute>
<item>
<attribute name="label">Cut</attribute>
<attribute name="action">app.cut</attribute>
<attribute name="verb-icon">edit-cut-symbolic</attribute>
</item>
<item>
<attribute name="label">Copy</attribute>
<attribute name="action">app.copy</attribute>
<attribute name="verb-icon">edit-copy-symbolic</attribute>
</item>
<item>
<attribute name="label">Paste</attribute>
<attribute name="action">app.paste</attribute>
<attribute name="verb-icon">edit-paste-symbolic</attribute>
</item>
</section>CSS nodes
popover.background[.menu]
├── arrow
╰── contents
╰── <child>gtk.popover.Popover has a main node with name popover, an arrow with name arrow, and another node for the content named contents. The popover node always gets the .background style class. It also gets the .menu style class if the popover is menu-like, e.g. is a gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu.
Particular uses of gtk.popover.Popover, such as touch selection popups or magnifiers in gtk.entry.Entry or gtk.text_view.TextView get style classes like .touch-selection or .magnifier to differentiate from plain popovers.
When styling a popover directly, the popover node should usually not have any background. The visible part of the popover can have a shadow. To specify it in CSS, set the box-shadow of the contents node.
Note that, in order to accomplish appropriate arrow visuals, gtk.popover.Popover uses custom drawing for the arrow node. This makes it possible for the arrow to change its shape dynamically, but it also limits the possibilities of styling it using CSS. In particular, the arrow gets drawn over the content node's border and shadow, so they look like one shape, which means that the border width of the content node and the arrow node should be the same. The arrow also does not support any border shape other than solid, no border-radius, only one border width (border-bottom-width is used) and no box-shadow.
GtkWidget parentGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkPopover * popover) closedvoid function(GtkPopover * popover) activateDefaultvoid *[8] reservedgtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu is a subclass of gtk.popover.Popover that implements menu behavior.
gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu treats its children like menus and allows switching between them. It can open submenus as traditional, nested submenus, or in a more touch-friendly sliding fashion. The property gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu.flags controls this appearance.
gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu is meant to be used primarily with menu models, using gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu.newFromModel. If you need to put other widgets such as a gtk.spin_button.SpinButton or a gtk.switch_.Switch into a popover, you can use gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu.addChild.
For more dialog-like behavior, use a plain gtk.popover.Popover.
Menu models
The XML format understood by gtk.builder.Builder for gio.menu_model.MenuModel consists of a toplevel <menu> element, which contains one or more <item> elements. Each <item> element contains <attribute> and <link> elements with a mandatory name attribute. <link> elements have the same content model as <menu>. Instead of <link name="submenu"> or <link name="section">, you can use <submenu> or <section> elements.
<menu id='app-menu'>
<section>
<item>
<attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_New Window</attribute>
<attribute name='action'>app.new</attribute>
</item>
<item>
<attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_About Sunny</attribute>
<attribute name='action'>app.about</attribute>
</item>
<item>
<attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Quit</attribute>
<attribute name='action'>app.quit</attribute>
</item>
</section>
</menu>Attribute values can be translated using gettext, like other gtk.builder.Builder content. <attribute> elements can be marked for translation with a translatable="yes" attribute. It is also possible to specify message context and translator comments, using the context and comments attributes. To make use of this, the gtk.builder.Builder must have been given the gettext domain to use.
The following attributes are used when constructing menu items:
- "label": a user-visible string to display
- "use-markup": whether the text in the menu item includes Pango markup
- "action": the prefixed name of the action to trigger
- "target": the parameter to use when activating the action
- "icon" and "verb-icon": names of icons that may be displayed
- "submenu-action": name of an action that may be used to track whether a submenu is open
- "hidden-when": a string used to determine when the item will be hidden. Possible values include "action-disabled", "action-missing", "macos-menubar". This is mainly useful for exported menus, see gtk.application.Application.setMenubar.
- "custom": a string used to match against the ID of a custom child added with gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu.addChild, gtk.popover_menu_bar.PopoverMenuBar.addChild, or in the ui file with
<child type="ID">.
The following attributes are used when constructing sections:
- "label": a user-visible string to use as section heading
- "display-hint": a string used to determine special formatting for the section. Possible values include "horizontal-buttons", "circular-buttons" and "inline-buttons". They all indicate that section should be displayed as a horizontal row of buttons.
- "text-direction": a string used to determine the gtk.types.TextDirection to use when "display-hint" is set to "horizontal-buttons". Possible values include "rtl", "ltr", and "none".
The following attributes are used when constructing submenus:
- "label": a user-visible string to display
- "icon": icon name to display
Menu items will also show accelerators, which are usually associated with actions via gtk.application.Application.setAccelsForAction, gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.addBindingAction or gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController.addShortcut.
CSS Nodes
gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu is just a subclass of gtk.popover.Popover that adds custom content to it, therefore it has the same CSS nodes. It is one of the cases that add a .menu style class to the main popover node.
Menu items have nodes with name button and class .model. If a section display-hint is set, the section gets a node box with class horizontal plus a class with the same text as the display hint. Note that said box may not be the direct ancestor of the item buttons. Thus, for example, to style items in an inline-buttons section, select .inline-buttons button.model. Other things that may be of interest to style in menus include label nodes.
Accessibility
gtk.popover_menu.PopoverMenu uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Menu role, and its items use the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.MenuItem, gtk.types.AccessibleRole.MenuItemCheckbox or gtk.types.AccessibleRole.MenuItemRadio roles, depending on the action they are connected to.
gtk.popover_menu_bar.PopoverMenuBar presents a horizontal bar of items that pop up popover menus when clicked.
The only way to create instances of gtk.popover_menu_bar.PopoverMenuBar is from a gio.menu_model.MenuModel.
CSS nodes
menubar
├── item[.active]
┊ ╰── popover
╰── item
╰── popovergtk.popover_menu_bar.PopoverMenuBar has a single CSS node with name menubar, below which each item has its CSS node, and below that the corresponding popover.
The item whose popover is currently open gets the .active style class.
Accessibility
gtk.popover_menu_bar.PopoverMenuBar uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.MenuBar role, the menu items use the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.MenuItem role and the menus use the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Menu role.
A gtk.print_context.PrintContext encapsulates context information that is required when drawing pages for printing.
This includes the cairo context and important parameters like page size and resolution. It also lets you easily create pango.layout.Layout and pango.context.Context objects that match the font metrics of the cairo surface.
gtk.print_context.PrintContext objects get passed to the gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.beginPrint, gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.endPrint, gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.requestPageSetup and gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.drawPage signals on the gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation object.
Using GtkPrintContext in a ::draw-page callback
static void
draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation,
GtkPrintContext *context,
int page_nr)
{
cairo_t *cr;
PangoLayout *layout;
PangoFontDescription *desc;
cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context);
// Draw a red rectangle, as wide as the paper (inside the margins)
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 1.0, 0, 0);
cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, gtk_print_context_get_width (context), 50);
cairo_fill (cr);
// Draw some lines
cairo_move_to (cr, 20, 10);
cairo_line_to (cr, 40, 20);
cairo_arc (cr, 60, 60, 20, 0, M_PI);
cairo_line_to (cr, 80, 20);
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0, 0);
cairo_set_line_width (cr, 5);
cairo_set_line_cap (cr, CAIRO_LINE_CAP_ROUND);
cairo_set_line_join (cr, CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_ROUND);
cairo_stroke (cr);
// Draw some text
layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context);
pango_layout_set_text (layout, "Hello World! Printing is easy", -1);
desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 28");
pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc);
pango_font_description_free (desc);
cairo_move_to (cr, 30, 20);
pango_cairo_layout_path (cr, layout);
// Font Outline
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.93, 1.0, 0.47);
cairo_set_line_width (cr, 0.5);
cairo_stroke_preserve (cr);
// Font Fill
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0.0, 1.0);
cairo_fill (cr);
g_object_unref (layout);
}A gtk.print_dialog.PrintDialog object collects the arguments that are needed to present a print dialog to the user, such as a title for the dialog and whether it should be modal.
The dialog is shown with the gtk.print_dialog.PrintDialog.setup function. The actual printing can be done with gtk.print_dialog.PrintDialog.print or gtk.print_dialog.PrintDialog.printFile. These APIs follows the GIO async pattern, and the results can be obtained by calling the corresponding finish methods.
GObjectClass parentClassA gtk.print_job.PrintJob object represents a job that is sent to a printer.
You only need to deal directly with print jobs if you use the non-portable gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog API.
Use gtk.print_job.PrintJob.getSurface to obtain the cairo surface onto which the pages must be drawn. Use gtk.print_job.PrintJob.send to send the finished job to the printer. If you don’t use cairo gtk.print_job.PrintJob also supports printing of manually generated PostScript, via gtk.print_job.PrintJob.setSourceFile.
gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation is the high-level, portable printing API.
It looks a bit different than other GTK dialogs such as the gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser, since some platforms don’t expose enough infrastructure to implement a good print dialog. On such platforms, gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation uses the native print dialog. On platforms which do not provide a native print dialog, GTK uses its own, see gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog.
The typical way to use the high-level printing API is to create a gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation object with gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.new_ when the user selects to print. Then you set some properties on it, e.g. the page size, any gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings from previous print operations, the number of pages, the current page, etc.
Then you start the print operation by calling gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.run. It will then show a dialog, let the user select a printer and options. When the user finished the dialog, various signals will be emitted on the gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation, the main one being gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.drawPage, which you are supposed to handle and render the page on the provided gtk.print_context.PrintContext using Cairo.
The high-level printing API
static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;
static void
do_print (void)
{
GtkPrintOperation *print;
GtkPrintOperationResult res;
print = gtk_print_operation_new ();
if (settings != NULL)
gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
g_signal_connect (print, "begin_print", G_CALLBACK (begin_print), NULL);
g_signal_connect (print, "draw_page", G_CALLBACK (draw_page), NULL);
res = gtk_print_operation_run (print, GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
GTK_WINDOW (main_window), NULL);
if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
{
if (settings != NULL)
g_object_unref (settings);
settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
}
g_object_unref (print);
}By default gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation uses an external application to do print preview. To implement a custom print preview, an application must connect to the preview signal. The functions gtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview.renderPage, gtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview.endPreview and gtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview.isSelected are useful when implementing a print preview.
GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintOperationResult result) doneSignal emitted when the print operation run has finished doing everything required for printing.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context) beginPrintSignal emitted after the user has finished changing print settings in the dialog, before the actual rendering starts.gboolean function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context) paginateSignal emitted after the “begin-print” signal, but before the actual rendering starts.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context, int pageNr, GtkPageSetup * setup) requestPageSetupEmitted once for every page that is printed, to give the application a chance to modify the page setup.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context, int pageNr) drawPageSignal emitted for every page that is printed.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context) endPrintSignal emitted after all pages have been rendered.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation) statusChangedEmitted at between the various phases of the print operation.GtkWidget * function(GtkPrintOperation * operation) createCustomWidgetSignal emitted when displaying the print dialog.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkWidget * widget) customWidgetApplySignal emitted right before “begin-print” if you added a custom widget in the “create-custom-widget” handler.gboolean function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, GtkPrintContext * context, GtkWindow * parent) previewSignal emitted when a preview is requested from the native dialog.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkWidget * widget, GtkPageSetup * setup, GtkPrintSettings * settings) updateCustomWidgetEmitted after change of selected printer.void *[8] paddinggtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview is the interface that is used to implement print preview.
A gtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview object is passed to the gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.preview signal by gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, GtkPrintContext * context) readyvoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, GtkPrintContext * context, GtkPageSetup * pageSetup) gotPageSizevoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, int pageNr) renderPagegboolean function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, int pageNr) isSelectedvoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview) endPreviewvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8A gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings object represents the settings of a print dialog in a system-independent way.
The main use for this object is that once you’ve printed you can get a settings object that represents the settings the user chose, and the next time you print you can pass that object in so that the user doesn’t have to re-set all his settings.
Its also possible to enumerate the settings so that you can easily save the settings for the next time your app runs, or even store them in a document. The predefined keys try to use shared values as much as possible so that moving such a document between systems still works.
A gtk.print_setup.PrintSetup is an auxiliary object for printing that allows decoupling the setup from the printing.
A print setup is obtained by calling gtk.print_dialog.PrintDialog.setup, and can later be passed to print functions such as gtk.print_dialog.PrintDialog.print.
Print setups can be reused for multiple print calls.
Applications may wish to store the page_setup and print_settings from the print setup and copy them to the PrintDialog if they want to keep using them.
gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog implements a print dialog for platforms which don’t provide a native print dialog, like Unix.
!An example GtkPrintUnixDialog
It can be used very much like any other GTK dialog, at the cost of the portability offered by the high-level printing API with gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.
In order to print something with gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog, you need to use gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog.getSelectedPrinter to obtain a gtk.printer.Printer object and use it to construct a gtk.print_job.PrintJob using gtk.print_job.PrintJob.new_.
gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog uses the following response values:
- gtk.types.ResponseType.Ok: for the “Print” button
- gtk.types.ResponseType.Apply: for the “Preview” button
- gtk.types.ResponseType.Cancel: for the “Cancel” button
GtkPrintUnixDialog as GtkBuildable
The gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface exposes its @notebook internal children with the name “notebook”.
An example of a gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog UI definition fragment:
<object class="GtkPrintUnixDialog" id="dialog1">
<child internal-child="notebook">
<object class="GtkNotebook" id="notebook">
<child>
<object type="GtkNotebookPage">
<property name="tab_expand">False</property>
<property name="tab_fill">False</property>
<property name="tab">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="tablabel">
<property name="label">Tab label</property>
</object>
</property>
<property name="child">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="tabcontent">
<property name="label">Content on notebook tab</property>
</object>
</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog has a single CSS node with name window. The style classes dialog and print are added.
A gtk.printer.Printer object represents a printer.
You only need to deal directly with printers if you use the non-portable gtk.print_unix_dialog.PrintUnixDialog API.
A gtk.printer.Printer allows to get status information about the printer, such as its description, its location, the number of queued jobs, etc. Most importantly, a gtk.printer.Printer object can be used to create a gtk.print_job.PrintJob object, which lets you print to the printer.
gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar is typically used to display the progress of a long running operation.
It provides a visual clue that processing is underway. gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar can be used in two different modes: percentage mode and activity mode.
When an application can determine how much work needs to take place (e.g. read a fixed number of bytes from a file) and can monitor its progress, it can use the gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar in percentage mode and the user sees a growing bar indicating the percentage of the work that has been completed. In this mode, the application is required to call gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar.setFraction periodically to update the progress bar.
When an application has no accurate way of knowing the amount of work to do, it can use the gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar in activity mode, which shows activity by a block moving back and forth within the progress area. In this mode, the application is required to call gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar.pulse periodically to update the progress bar.
There is quite a bit of flexibility provided to control the appearance of the gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar. Functions are provided to control the orientation of the bar, optional text can be displayed along with the bar, and the step size used in activity mode can be set.
CSS nodes
progressbar[.osd]
├── [text]
╰── trough[.empty][.full]
╰── progress[.pulse]gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar has a main CSS node with name progressbar and subnodes with names text and trough, of which the latter has a subnode named progress. The text subnode is only present if text is shown. The progress subnode has the style class .pulse when in activity mode. It gets the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom added when the progress 'touches' the corresponding end of the GtkProgressBar. The .osd class on the progressbar node is for use in overlays like the one Epiphany has for page loading progress.
Accessibility
gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ProgressBar role.
A gobject.object.ObjectWrap property value in a gtk.expression.Expression.
gtk.range.Range is the common base class for widgets which visualize an adjustment.
Widgets that are derived from gtk.range.Range include gtk.scale.Scale and gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar.
Apart from signals for monitoring the parameters of the adjustment, gtk.range.Range provides properties and methods for setting a “fill level” on range widgets. See gtk.range.Range.setFillLevel.
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkRange * range) valueChangedvoid function(GtkRange * range, double newValue) adjustBoundsvoid function(GtkRange * range, GtkScrollType scroll) moveSlidergboolean function(GtkRange * range, GtkScrollType scroll, double newValue) changeValuevoid *[8] paddingMeta-data to be passed to gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager.addFull when registering a recently used resource.
char * displayNamea UTF-8 encoded string, containing the name of the recently used resource to be displayed, or null;char * descriptiona UTF-8 encoded string, containing a short description of the resource, or null;char * mimeTypethe MIME type of the resource;char * appNamethe name of the application that is registering this recently used resource;char * appExeccommand line used to launch this resource; may contain the “\`f`” and “\`u`” escape characters which will be expanded to the resource file path and URI respectively when the command line is...char * * groupsa vector of strings containing groups names;gboolean isPrivatewhether this resource should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it or not.gtk.recent_info.RecentInfo contains the metadata associated with an item in the recently used files list.
gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager manages and looks up recently used files.
Each recently used file is identified by its URI, and has meta-data associated to it, like the names and command lines of the applications that have registered it, the number of time each application has registered the same file, the mime type of the file and whether the file should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it.
The recently used files list is per user.
gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager acts like a database of all the recently used files. You can create new gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager objects, but it is more efficient to use the default manager created by GTK.
Adding a new recently used file is as simple as:
GtkRecentManager *manager;
manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
gtk_recent_manager_add_item (manager, file_uri);The gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager will try to gather all the needed information from the file itself through GIO.
Looking up the meta-data associated with a recently used file given its URI requires calling gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager.lookupItem:
GtkRecentManager *manager;
GtkRecentInfo *info;
GError *error = NULL;
manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
info = gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item (manager, file_uri, &error);
if (error)
{
g_warning ("Could not find the file: %s", error->message);
g_error_free (error);
}
else
{
// Use the info object
gtk_recent_info_unref (info);
}In order to retrieve the list of recently used files, you can use gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager.getItems, which returns a list of gtk.recent_info.RecentInfo.
Note that the maximum age of the recently used files list is controllable through the gtk.settings.Settings.gtkRecentFilesMaxAge property.
gtk.recent_manager_class.RecentManagerClass contains only private data.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkRecentManager * manager) changedvoid function() GtkRecent1void function() GtkRecent2void function() GtkRecent3void function() GtkRecent4Represents a request of a screen object in a given orientation. These are primarily used in container implementations when allocating a natural size for children calling. See func@distribute_natural_allocation.
void * dataA client pointerint minimumSizeThe minimum size needed for allocation in a given orientationint naturalSizeThe natural size for allocation in a given orientationA gtk.requisition.Requisition represents the desired size of a widget. See GtkWidget’s geometry management section for more information.
int widththe widget’s desired widthint heightthe widget’s desired heightA gtk.revealer.Revealer animates the transition of its child from invisible to visible.
The style of transition can be controlled with gtk.revealer.Revealer.setTransitionType.
These animations respect the gtk.settings.Settings.gtkEnableAnimations setting.
CSS nodes
gtk.revealer.Revealer has a single CSS node with name revealer. When styling gtk.revealer.Revealer using CSS, remember that it only hides its contents, not itself. That means applied margin, padding and borders will be visible even when the gtk.revealer.Revealer.revealChild property is set to false.
Accessibility
gtk.revealer.Revealer uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
The child of gtk.revealer.Revealer, if set, is always available in the accessibility tree, regardless of the state of the revealer widget.
gtk.root.Root is the interface implemented by all widgets that can act as a toplevel widget.
The root widget takes care of providing the connection to the windowing system and manages layout, drawing and event delivery for its widget hierarchy.
The obvious example of a gtk.root.Root is gtk.window.Window.
To get the display to which a gtk.root.Root belongs, use gtk.root.Root.getDisplay.
gtk.root.Root also maintains the location of keyboard focus inside its widget hierarchy, with gtk.root.Root.setFocus and gtk.root.Root.getFocus.
A gtk.scale.Scale is a slider control used to select a numeric value.
To use it, you’ll probably want to investigate the methods on its base class, gtk.range.Range, in addition to the methods for gtk.scale.Scale itself. To set the value of a scale, you would normally use gtk.range.Range.setValue. To detect changes to the value, you would normally use the gtk.range.Range.valueChanged signal.
Note that using the same upper and lower bounds for the gtk.scale.Scale (through the gtk.range.Range methods) will hide the slider itself. This is useful for applications that want to show an undeterminate value on the scale, without changing the layout of the application (such as movie or music players).
GtkScale as GtkBuildable
gtk.scale.Scale supports a custom <marks> element, which can contain multiple <mark\> elements. The “value” and “position” attributes have the same meaning as gtk.scale.Scale.addMark parameters of the same name. If the element is not empty, its content is taken as the markup to show at the mark. It can be translated with the usual ”translatable” and “context” attributes.
CSS nodes
scale[.fine-tune][.marks-before][.marks-after]
├── [value][.top][.right][.bottom][.left]
├── marks.top
│ ├── mark
│ ┊ ├── [label]
│ ┊ ╰── indicator
┊ ┊
│ ╰── mark
├── marks.bottom
│ ├── mark
│ ┊ ├── indicator
│ ┊ ╰── [label]
┊ ┊
│ ╰── mark
╰── trough
├── [fill]
├── [highlight]
╰── slidergtk.scale.Scale has a main CSS node with name scale and a subnode for its contents, with subnodes named trough and slider.
The main node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scale is in 'fine-tuning' mode.
If the scale has an origin (see gtk.scale.Scale.setHasOrigin), there is a subnode with name highlight below the trough node that is used for rendering the highlighted part of the trough.
If the scale is showing a fill level (see gtk.range.Range.setShowFillLevel), there is a subnode with name fill below the trough node that is used for rendering the filled in part of the trough.
If marks are present, there is a marks subnode before or after the trough node, below which each mark gets a node with name mark. The marks nodes get either the .top or .bottom style class.
The mark node has a subnode named indicator. If the mark has text, it also has a subnode named label. When the mark is either above or left of the scale, the label subnode is the first when present. Otherwise, the indicator subnode is the first.
The main CSS node gets the 'marks-before' and/or 'marks-after' style classes added depending on what marks are present.
If the scale is displaying the value (see gtk.scale.Scale.drawValue), there is subnode with name value. This node will get the .top or .bottom style classes similar to the marks node.
Accessibility
gtk.scale.Scale uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Slider role.
GtkRange parentInstancegtk.scale_button.ScaleButton provides a button which pops up a scale widget.
This kind of widget is commonly used for volume controls in multimedia applications, and GTK provides a gtk.volume_button.VolumeButton subclass that is tailored for this use case.
CSS nodes
scalebutton.scale
╰── button.toggle
╰── <icon>gtk.scale_button.ScaleButton has a single CSS node with name scalebutton and .scale style class, and contains a button node with a .toggle style class.
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkScaleButton * button, double value) valueChangedvoid *[8] paddingGtkRangeClass parentClassvoid function(GtkScale * scale, int * x, int * y) getLayoutOffsetsvoid *[8] paddingThe gtk.scroll_info.ScrollInfo can be used to provide more accurate data on how a scroll operation should be performed.
Scrolling functions usually allow passing a null scroll info which will cause the default values to be used and just scroll the element into view.
gtk.scrollable.Scrollable is an interface for widgets with native scrolling ability.
To implement this interface you should override the gtk.scrollable.Scrollable.hadjustment and gtk.scrollable.Scrollable.vadjustment properties.
Creating a scrollable widget
All scrollable widgets should do the following.
- When a parent widget sets the scrollable child widget’s adjustments, the widget should connect to the gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.valueChanged signal. The child widget should then populate the adjustments’ properties as soon as possible, which usually means queueing an allocation right away and populating the properties in the
vfunc@Gtk.Widget.size_allocateimplementation. - Because its preferred size is the size for a fully expanded widget, the scrollable widget must be able to cope with underallocations. This means that it must accept any value passed to its
vfunc@Gtk.Widget.size_allocateimplementation. - When the parent allocates space to the scrollable child widget, the widget must ensure the adjustments’ property values are correct and up to date, for example using gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.configure.
- When any of the adjustments emits the gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.valueChanged signal, the scrollable widget should scroll its contents.
GTypeInterface baseIfacegboolean function(GtkScrollable * scrollable, GtkBorder * border) getBorderThe gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar widget is a horizontal or vertical scrollbar.
Its position and movement are controlled by the adjustment that is passed to or created by gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar.new_. See gtk.adjustment.Adjustment for more details. The gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.value field sets the position of the thumb and must be between gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.lower and gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.upper - gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.pageSize. The gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.pageSize represents the size of the visible scrollable area.
The fields gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.stepIncrement and gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.pageIncrement fields are added to or subtracted from the gtk.adjustment.Adjustment.value when the user asks to move by a step (using e.g. the cursor arrow keys) or by a page (using e.g. the Page Down/Up keys).
CSS nodes
scrollbar
╰── range[.fine-tune]
╰── trough
╰── slidergtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar has a main CSS node with name scrollbar and a subnode for its contents. The main node gets the .horizontal or .vertical style classes applied, depending on the scrollbar's orientation.
The range node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scrollbar is in 'fine-tuning' mode.
Other style classes that may be added to scrollbars inside gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow include the positional classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering).
Accessibility
gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Scrollbar role.
gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow is a container that makes its child scrollable.
It does so using either internally added scrollbars or externally associated adjustments, and optionally draws a frame around the child.
Widgets with native scrolling support, i.e. those whose classes implement the gtk.scrollable.Scrollable interface, are added directly. For other types of widget, the class gtk.viewport.Viewport acts as an adaptor, giving scrollability to other widgets. gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.setChild intelligently accounts for whether or not the added child is a gtk.scrollable.Scrollable. If it isn’t, then it wraps the child in a gtk.viewport.Viewport. Therefore, you can just add any child widget and not worry about the details.
If gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.setChild has added a gtk.viewport.Viewport for you, it will be automatically removed when you unset the child. Unless gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.hscrollbarPolicy and gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.vscrollbarPolicy are gtk.types.PolicyType.Never or gtk.types.PolicyType.External, gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow adds internal gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar widgets around its child. The scroll position of the child, and if applicable the scrollbars, is controlled by the gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.hadjustment and gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.vadjustment that are associated with the gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow. See the docs on gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar for the details, but note that the “step_increment” and “page_increment” fields are only effective if the policy causes scrollbars to be present.
If a gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow doesn’t behave quite as you would like, or doesn’t have exactly the right layout, it’s very possible to set up your own scrolling with gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar and for example a gtk.grid.Grid.
Touch support
gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow has built-in support for touch devices. When a touchscreen is used, swiping will move the scrolled window, and will expose 'kinetic' behavior. This can be turned off with the gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.kineticScrolling property if it is undesired.
gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow also displays visual 'overshoot' indication when the content is pulled beyond the end, and this situation can be captured with the gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.edgeOvershot signal.
If no mouse device is present, the scrollbars will overlaid as narrow, auto-hiding indicators over the content. If traditional scrollbars are desired although no mouse is present, this behaviour can be turned off with the gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.overlayScrolling property.
CSS nodes
gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow has a main CSS node with name scrolledwindow. It gets a .frame style class added when gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow.hasFrame is true.
It uses subnodes with names overshoot and undershoot to draw the overflow and underflow indications. These nodes get the .left, .right, .top or .bottom style class added depending on where the indication is drawn.
gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow also sets the positional style classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering) on its scrollbars.
If both scrollbars are visible, the area where they meet is drawn with a subnode named junction.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Starting from GTK 4.12, gtk.scrolled_window.ScrolledWindow uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Generic role.
gtk.search_bar.SearchBar is a container made to have a search entry.
It can also contain additional widgets, such as drop-down menus, or buttons. The search bar would appear when a search is started through typing on the keyboard, or the application’s search mode is toggled on.
For keyboard presses to start a search, the search bar must be told of a widget to capture key events from through gtk.search_bar.SearchBar.setKeyCaptureWidget. This widget will typically be the top-level window, or a parent container of the search bar. Common shortcuts such as Ctrl+F should be handled as an application action, or through the menu items.
You will also need to tell the search bar about which entry you are using as your search entry using gtk.search_bar.SearchBar.connectEntry.
Creating a search bar
The following example shows you how to create a more complex search entry.
CSS nodes
searchbar
╰── revealer
╰── box
├── [child]
╰── [button.close]gtk.search_bar.SearchBar has a main CSS node with name searchbar. It has a child node with name revealer that contains a node with name box. The box node contains both the CSS node of the child widget as well as an optional button node which gets the .close style class applied.
Accessibility
gtk.search_bar.SearchBar uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Search role.
gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry is an entry widget that has been tailored for use as a search entry.
The main API for interacting with a gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry as entry is the gtk.editable.Editable interface.
It will show an inactive symbolic “find” icon when the search entry is empty, and a symbolic “clear” icon when there is text. Clicking on the “clear” icon will empty the search entry.
To make filtering appear more reactive, it is a good idea to not react to every change in the entry text immediately, but only after a short delay. To support this, gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry emits the gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry.searchChanged signal which can be used instead of the gtk.editable.Editable.changed signal.
The gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry.previousMatch, gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry.nextMatch and gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry.stopSearch signals can be used to implement moving between search results and ending the search.
Often, gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry will be fed events by means of being placed inside a gtk.search_bar.SearchBar. If that is not the case, you can use gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry.setKeyCaptureWidget to let it capture key input from another widget.
gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry provides only minimal API and should be used with the gtk.editable.Editable API.
CSS Nodes
entry.search
╰── textgtk.search_entry.SearchEntry has a single CSS node with name entry that carries a .search style class, and the text node is a child of that.
Accessibility
gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.SearchBox role.
gtk.section_model.SectionModel is an interface that adds support for sections to list models.
A gtk.section_model.SectionModel groups successive items into so-called sections. List widgets like gtk.list_view.ListView and gtk.grid_view.GridView then allow displaying section headers for these sections by installing a header factory.
Many GTK list models support sections inherently, or they pass through the sections of a model they are wrapping.
When the section groupings of a model change, the model will emit the gtk.section_model.SectionModel.sectionsChanged signal by calling the gtk.section_model.SectionModel.sectionsChanged function. All sections in the given range then need to be queried again. The gio.list_model.ListModel.itemsChanged signal has the same effect, all sections in that range are invalidated, too.
The list of virtual functions for the gtk.section_model.SectionModel interface. No function must be implemented, but unless GtkSectionModel::get_section() is implemented, the whole model will just be a single section.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkSectionModel * self, uint position, uint * outStart, uint * outEnd) getSectionReturn the section that covers the given position. If the position is outside the number of items, returns a single range from n_items to G_MAXUINTgtk.selection_filter_model.SelectionFilterModel is a list model that presents the selection from a gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.selection_model.SelectionModel is an interface that add support for selection to list models.
This support is then used by widgets using list models to add the ability to select and unselect various items.
GTK provides default implementations of the most common selection modes such as gtk.single_selection.SingleSelection, so you will only need to implement this interface if you want detailed control about how selections should be handled.
A gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel supports a single boolean per item indicating if an item is selected or not. This can be queried via gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel.isSelected. When the selected state of one or more items changes, the model will emit the gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel.selectionChanged signal by calling the gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel.selectionChanged function. The positions given in that signal may have their selection state changed, though that is not a requirement. If new items added to the model via the gio.list_model.ListModel.itemsChanged signal are selected or not is up to the implementation.
Note that items added via gio.list_model.ListModel.itemsChanged may already be selected and no gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel.selectionChanged will be emitted for them. So to track which items are selected, it is necessary to listen to both signals.
Additionally, the interface can expose functionality to select and unselect items. If these functions are implemented, GTK's list widgets will allow users to select and unselect items. However, gtk.selection_model.SelectionModels are free to only implement them partially or not at all. In that case the widgets will not support the unimplemented operations.
When selecting or unselecting is supported by a model, the return values of the selection functions do not indicate if selection or unselection happened. They are only meant to indicate complete failure, like when this mode of selecting is not supported by the model.
Selections may happen asynchronously, so the only reliable way to find out when an item was selected is to listen to the signals that indicate selection.
The list of virtual functions for the gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel interface. No function must be implemented, but unless GtkSelectionModel::is_selected() is implemented, it will not be possible to select items in the set.
The model does not need to implement any functions to support either selecting or unselecting items. Of course, if the model does not do that, it means that users cannot select or unselect items in a list widget using the model.
All selection functions fall back to GtkSelectionModel::set_selection() so it is sufficient to implement just that function for full selection support.
GTypeInterface gIfacegboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model, uint position) isSelectedReturn if the item at the given position is selected.GtkBitset * function(GtkSelectionModel * model, uint position, uint nItems) getSelectionInRangeReturn a bitset with all currently selected items in the given range. By default, this function will call `GtkSelectionModel::is_selected()` on all items in the given range.gboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model, uint position, gboolean unselectRest) selectItemSelect the item in the given position. If the operation is known to fail, return false.gboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model, uint position) unselectItemUnselect the item in the given position. If the operation is known to fail, return false.gboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model, uint position, uint nItems, gboolean unselectRest) selectRangeSelect all items in the given range. If the operation is unsupported or known to fail for all items, return false.gboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model, uint position, uint nItems) unselectRangeUnselect all items in the given range. If the operation is unsupported or known to fail for all items, return false.gboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model) selectAllSelect all items in the model. If the operation is unsupported or known to fail for all items, return false.gboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model) unselectAllUnselect all items in the model. If the operation is unsupported or known to fail for all items, return false.gboolean function(GtkSelectionModel * model, GtkBitset * selected, GtkBitset * mask) setSelectionSet selection state of all items in mask to selected. See [gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel.setSelection] for a detailed explanation of this function.gtk.separator.Separator is a horizontal or vertical separator widget.
A gtk.separator.Separator can be used to group the widgets within a window. It displays a line with a shadow to make it appear sunken into the interface.
CSS nodes
gtk.separator.Separator has a single CSS node with name separator. The node gets one of the .horizontal or .vertical style classes.
Accessibility
gtk.separator.Separator uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Separator role.
gtk.settings.Settings provides a mechanism to share global settings between applications.
On the X window system, this sharing is realized by an XSettings manager that is usually part of the desktop environment, along with utilities that let the user change these settings.
On Wayland, the settings are obtained either via a settings portal, or by reading desktop settings from DConf.
On macOS, the settings are obtained from NSUserDefaults.
In the absence of these sharing mechanisms, GTK reads default values for settings from settings.ini files in /etc/gtk-4.0, $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS/gtk-4.0 and $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0. These files must be valid key files (see glib.key_file.KeyFile), and have a section called Settings. Themes can also provide default values for settings by installing a settings.ini file next to their gtk.css file.
Applications can override system-wide settings by setting the property of the gtk.settings.Settings object with gobject.object.ObjectWrap.set. This should be restricted to special cases though; gtk.settings.Settings are not meant as an application configuration facility.
There is one gtk.settings.Settings instance per display. It can be obtained with gtk.settings.Settings.getForDisplay, but in many cases, it is more convenient to use gtk.widget.Widget.getSettings.
A gtk.shortcut.Shortcut describes a keyboard shortcut.
It contains a description of how to trigger the shortcut via a gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger and a way to activate the shortcut on a widget via a gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction.
The actual work is usually done via gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController, which decides if and when to activate a shortcut. Using that controller directly however is rarely necessary as various higher level convenience APIs exist on gtk.widget.Widgets that make it easier to use shortcuts in GTK.
gtk.shortcut.Shortcut does provide functionality to make it easy for users to work with shortcuts, either by providing informational strings for display purposes or by allowing shortcuts to be configured.
gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction encodes an action that can be triggered by a keyboard shortcut.
GtkShortcutActions contain functions that allow easy presentation to end users as well as being printed for debugging.
All GtkShortcutActions are immutable, you can only specify their properties during construction. If you want to change a action, you have to replace it with a new one. If you need to pass arguments to an action, these are specified by the higher-level gtk.shortcut.Shortcut object.
To activate a gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction manually, gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction.activate can be called.
GTK provides various actions:
- gtk.mnemonic_action.MnemonicAction: a shortcut action that calls gtk.widget.Widget.mnemonicActivate
- gtk.callback_action.CallbackAction: a shortcut action that invokes a given callback
- gtk.signal_action.SignalAction: a shortcut action that emits a given signal
- gtk.activate_action.ActivateAction: a shortcut action that calls gtk.widget.Widget.activate
- gtk.named_action.NamedAction: a shortcut action that calls gtk.widget.Widget.activateAction
- gtk.nothing_action.NothingAction: a shortcut action that does nothing
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController is an event controller that manages shortcuts.
Most common shortcuts are using this controller implicitly, e.g. by adding a mnemonic underline to a gtk.label.Label, or by installing a key binding using gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.addBinding, or by adding accelerators to global actions using gtk.application.Application.setAccelsForAction.
But it is possible to create your own shortcut controller, and add shortcuts to it.
gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController implements gio.list_model.ListModel for querying the shortcuts that have been added to it.
GtkShortcutController as GtkBuildable
gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutControllers can be created in gtk.builder.Builder ui files, to set up shortcuts in the same place as the widgets.
An example of a UI definition fragment with gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController:
<object class='GtkButton'>
<child>
<object class='GtkShortcutController'>
<property name='scope'>managed</property>
<child>
<object class='GtkShortcut'>
<property name='trigger'><Control>k</property>
<property name='action'>activate</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
</object>This example creates a gtk.activate_action.ActivateAction for triggering the activate signal of the gtk.button.Button. See gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction.parseString for the syntax for other kinds of gtk.shortcut_action.ShortcutAction. See gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger.parseString to learn more about the syntax for triggers.
gtk.shortcut_label.ShortcutLabel displays a single keyboard shortcut or gesture.
The main use case for gtk.shortcut_label.ShortcutLabel is inside a gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow.
The gtk.shortcut_manager.ShortcutManager interface is used to implement shortcut scopes.
This is important for gtk.native.Native widgets that have their own surface, since the event controllers that are used to implement managed and global scopes are limited to the same native.
Examples for widgets implementing gtk.shortcut_manager.ShortcutManager are gtk.window.Window and gtk.popover.Popover.
Every widget that implements gtk.shortcut_manager.ShortcutManager will be used as a gtk.types.ShortcutScope.Managed.
The list of functions that can be implemented for the gtk.shortcut_manager.ShortcutManager interface.
Note that no function is mandatory to implement, the default implementation will work fine.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkShortcutManager * self, GtkShortcutController * controller) addControllerAdd a [gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController] to be managed.void function(GtkShortcutManager * self, GtkShortcutController * controller) removeControllerRemove a [gtk.shortcut_controller.ShortcutController] that had previously been addedgtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger tracks how a gtk.shortcut.Shortcut should be activated.
To find out if a gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger triggers, you can call gtk.shortcut_trigger.ShortcutTrigger.trigger on a gdk.event.Event.
GtkShortcutTriggers contain functions that allow easy presentation to end users as well as being printed for debugging.
All GtkShortcutTriggers are immutable, you can only specify their properties during construction. If you want to change a trigger, you have to replace it with a new one.
A gtk.shortcuts_group.ShortcutsGroup represents a group of related keyboard shortcuts or gestures.
The group has a title. It may optionally be associated with a view of the application, which can be used to show only relevant shortcuts depending on the application context.
This widget is only meant to be used with gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow.
The recommended way to construct a gtk.shortcuts_group.ShortcutsGroup is with gtk.builder.Builder, by using the <child> tag to populate a gtk.shortcuts_group.ShortcutsGroup with one or more gtk.shortcuts_shortcut.ShortcutsShortcut instances.
If you need to add a shortcut programmatically, use gtk.shortcuts_group.ShortcutsGroup.addShortcut.
A gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection collects all the keyboard shortcuts and gestures for a major application mode.
If your application needs multiple sections, you should give each section a unique gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection.sectionName and a gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection.title that can be shown in the section selector of the gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow.
The gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection.maxHeight property can be used to influence how the groups in the section are distributed over pages and columns.
This widget is only meant to be used with gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow.
The recommended way to construct a gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection is with gtk.builder.Builder, by using the <child> tag to populate a gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection with one or more gtk.shortcuts_group.ShortcutsGroup instances, which in turn contain one or more gtk.shortcuts_shortcut.ShortcutsShortcut objects.
If you need to add a group programmatically, use gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection.addGroup.
A gtk.shortcuts_shortcut.ShortcutsShortcut represents a single keyboard shortcut or gesture with a short text.
This widget is only meant to be used with gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow.
A gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow shows information about the keyboard shortcuts and gestures of an application.
The shortcuts can be grouped, and you can have multiple sections in this window, corresponding to the major modes of your application.
Additionally, the shortcuts can be filtered by the current view, to avoid showing information that is not relevant in the current application context.
The recommended way to construct a gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow is with gtk.builder.Builder, by using the <child> tag to populate a gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow with one or more gtk.shortcuts_section.ShortcutsSection objects, which contain one or more gtk.shortcuts_group.ShortcutsGroup instances, which, in turn, contain gtk.shortcuts_shortcut.ShortcutsShortcut instances.
If you need to add a section programmatically, use gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow.addSection instead of gtk.window.Window.setChild, as the shortcuts window manages its children directly.
A simple example:

This example has as single section. As you can see, the shortcut groups are arranged in columns, and spread across several pages if there are too many to find on a single page.
The .ui file for this example can be found here.
An example with multiple views:

This example shows a gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow that has been configured to show only the shortcuts relevant to the "stopwatch" view.
The .ui file for this example can be found here.
An example with multiple sections:

This example shows a gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow with two sections, "Editor Shortcuts" and "Terminal Shortcuts".
The .ui file for this example can be found here.
CSS nodes
gtk.shortcuts_window.ShortcutsWindow has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .shortcuts.
A gtk.shortcut.ShortcutAction that emits a signal.
Signals that are used in this way are referred to as keybinding signals, and they are expected to be defined with the G_SIGNAL_ACTION flag.
gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory is a gtk.list_item_factory.ListItemFactory that emits signals to manage listitems.
Signals are emitted for every listitem in the same order:
- gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.setup is emitted to set up permanent things on the listitem. This usually means constructing the widgets used in the row and adding them to the listitem.
- gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.bind is emitted to bind the item passed via gtk.list_item.ListItem.item to the widgets that have been created in step 1 or to add item-specific widgets. Signals are connected to listen to changes - both to changes in the item to update the widgets or to changes in the widgets to update the item. After this signal has been called, the listitem may be shown in a list widget.
- gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.unbind is emitted to undo everything done in step 2. Usually this means disconnecting signal handlers. Once this signal has been called, the listitem will no longer be used in a list widget.
- gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.bind and gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.unbind may be emitted multiple times again to bind the listitem for use with new items. By reusing listitems, potentially costly setup can be avoided. However, it means code needs to make sure to properly clean up the listitem in step 3 so that no information from the previous use leaks into the next use.
- gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.teardown is emitted to allow undoing the effects of gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.setup. After this signal was emitted on a listitem, the listitem will be destroyed and not be used again.
Note that during the signal emissions, changing properties on the listitems passed will not trigger notify signals as the listitem's notifications are frozen. See gobject.object.ObjectWrap.freezeNotify for details.
For tracking changes in other properties in the listitem, the ::notify signal is recommended. The signal can be connected in the gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.setup signal and removed again during gtk.signal_list_item_factory.SignalListItemFactory.teardown.
gtk.single_selection.SingleSelection is a gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel that allows selecting a single item.
Note that the selection is persistent -- if the selected item is removed and re-added in the same gio.list_model.ListModel.itemsChanged emission, it stays selected. In particular, this means that changing the sort order of an underlying sort model will preserve the selection.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.size_group.SizeGroup groups widgets together so they all request the same size.
This is typically useful when you want a column of widgets to have the same size, but you can’t use a gtk.grid.Grid.
In detail, the size requested for each widget in a gtk.size_group.SizeGroup is the maximum of the sizes that would have been requested for each widget in the size group if they were not in the size group. The mode of the size group (see gtk.size_group.SizeGroup.setMode) determines whether this applies to the horizontal size, the vertical size, or both sizes.
Note that size groups only affect the amount of space requested, not the size that the widgets finally receive. If you want the widgets in a gtk.size_group.SizeGroup to actually be the same size, you need to pack them in such a way that they get the size they request and not more.
gtk.size_group.SizeGroup objects are referenced by each widget in the size group, so once you have added all widgets to a gtk.size_group.SizeGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the size group with gobject.object.ObjectWrap.unref. If the widgets in the size group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the size group and drop their references on the size group; when all widgets have been removed, the size group will be freed.
Widgets can be part of multiple size groups; GTK will compute the horizontal size of a widget from the horizontal requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Horizontal or gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Both, and the vertical size from the vertical requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Vertical or gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Both.
Note that only non-contextual sizes of every widget are ever consulted by size groups (since size groups have no knowledge of what size a widget will be allocated in one dimension, it cannot derive how much height a widget will receive for a given width). When grouping widgets that trade height for width in mode gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Vertical or gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Both: the height for the minimum width will be the requested height for all widgets in the group. The same is of course true when horizontally grouping width for height widgets.
Widgets that trade height-for-width should set a reasonably large minimum width by way of gtk.label.Label.widthChars for instance. Widgets with static sizes as well as widgets that grow (such as ellipsizing text) need no such considerations.
GtkSizeGroup as GtkBuildable
Size groups can be specified in a UI definition by placing an <object> element with class="GtkSizeGroup" somewhere in the UI definition. The widgets that belong to the size group are specified by a <widgets> element that may contain multiple <widget> elements, one for each member of the size group. The ”name” attribute gives the id of the widget.
An example of a UI definition fragment with gtk.size_group.SizeGroup:
<object class="GtkSizeGroup">
<property name="mode">horizontal</property>
<widgets>
<widget name="radio1"/>
<widget name="radio2"/>
</widgets>
</object>GObject parentInstancegtk.slice_list_model.SliceListModel is a list model that presents a slice of another model.
This is useful when implementing paging by setting the size to the number of elements per page and updating the offset whenever a different page is opened.
gtk.slice_list_model.SliceListModel passes through sections from the underlying model.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.snapshot.Snapshot assists in creating gsk.render_node.RenderNodes for widgets.
It functions in a similar way to a cairo context, and maintains a stack of render nodes and their associated transformations.
The node at the top of the stack is the one that gtk_snapshot_append_…() functions operate on. Use the gtk_snapshot_push_…() functions and gtk.snapshot.Snapshot.pop to change the current node.
The typical way to obtain a gtk.snapshot.Snapshot object is as an argument to the vfunc@Gtk.Widget.snapshot vfunc. If you need to create your own gtk.snapshot.Snapshot, use gtk.snapshot.Snapshot.new_.
A gio.list_model.ListModel that sorts the elements of an underlying model according to a gtk.sorter.Sorter.
The model is a stable sort. If two items compare equal according to the sorter, the one that appears first in the original model will also appear first after sorting. Note that if you change the sorter, the previous order will have no influence on the new order. If you want that, consider using a gtk.multi_sorter.MultiSorter and appending the previous sorter to it.
The model can be set up to do incremental sorting, so that sorting long lists doesn't block the UI. See gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel.setIncremental for details.
gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel is a generic model and because of that it cannot take advantage of any external knowledge when sorting. If you run into performance issues with gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel, it is strongly recommended that you write your own sorting list model.
gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel allows sorting the items into sections. It implements gtk.section_model.SectionModel and when gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel.sectionSorter is set, it will sort all items with that sorter and items comparing equal with it will be put into the same section. The gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel.sorter will then be used to sort items inside their sections.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.sorter.Sorter is an object to describe sorting criteria.
Its primary user is gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel
The model will use a sorter to determine the order in which its items should appear by calling gtk.sorter.Sorter.compare for pairs of items.
Sorters may change their sorting behavior through their lifetime. In that case, they will emit the gtk.sorter.Sorter.changed signal to notify that the sort order is no longer valid and should be updated by calling gtk.sorter.Sorter.compare again.
GTK provides various pre-made sorter implementations for common sorting operations. gtk.column_view.ColumnView has built-in support for sorting lists via the gtk.column_view_column.ColumnViewColumn.sorter property, where the user can change the sorting by clicking on list headers.
Of course, in particular for large lists, it is also possible to subclass gtk.sorter.Sorter and provide one's own sorter.
GObject parentInstanceThe virtual table for gtk.sorter.Sorter.
GObjectClass parentClassGtkOrdering function(GtkSorter * self, GObject * item1, GObject * item2) compareCompare two items. See [gtk.sorter.Sorter.compare] for details.GtkSorterOrder function(GtkSorter * self) getOrderGet the `GtkSorderOrder` that applies to the current sorter. If unimplemented, it returns [gtk.types.SorterOrder.Partial].void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8A gtk.spin_button.SpinButton is an ideal way to allow the user to set the value of some attribute.
Rather than having to directly type a number into a gtk.entry.Entry, gtk.spin_button.SpinButton allows the user to click on one of two arrows to increment or decrement the displayed value. A value can still be typed in, with the bonus that it can be checked to ensure it is in a given range.
The main properties of a gtk.spin_button.SpinButton are through an adjustment. See the gtk.adjustment.Adjustment documentation for more details about an adjustment's properties.
Note that gtk.spin_button.SpinButton will by default make its entry large enough to accommodate the lower and upper bounds of the adjustment. If this is not desired, the automatic sizing can be turned off by explicitly setting gtk.editable.Editable.widthChars to a value != -1.
Using a GtkSpinButton to get an integer
// Provides a function to retrieve an integer value from a GtkSpinButton
// and creates a spin button to model percentage values.
int
grab_int_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
gpointer user_data)
{
return gtk_spin_button_get_value_as_int (button);
}
void
create_integer_spin_button (void)
{
GtkWidget *window, *button;
GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (50.0, 0.0, 100.0, 1.0, 5.0, 0.0);
window = gtk_window_new ();
// creates the spinbutton, with no decimal places
button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 1.0, 0);
gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), button);
gtk_window_present (GTK_WINDOW (window));
}Using a GtkSpinButton to get a floating point value
// Provides a function to retrieve a floating point value from a
// GtkSpinButton, and creates a high precision spin button.
float
grab_float_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
gpointer user_data)
{
return gtk_spin_button_get_value (button);
}
void
create_floating_spin_button (void)
{
GtkWidget *window, *button;
GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (2.500, 0.0, 5.0, 0.001, 0.1, 0.0);
window = gtk_window_new ();
// creates the spinbutton, with three decimal places
button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 0.001, 3);
gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), button);
gtk_window_present (GTK_WINDOW (window));
}CSS nodes
spinbutton.horizontal
├── text
│ ├── undershoot.left
│ ╰── undershoot.right
├── button.down
╰── button.upspinbutton.vertical
├── button.up
├── text
│ ├── undershoot.left
│ ╰── undershoot.right
╰── button.downgtk.spin_button.SpinButtons main CSS node has the name spinbutton. It creates subnodes for the entry and the two buttons, with these names. The button nodes have the style classes .up and .down. The gtk.text.Text subnodes (if present) are put below the text node. The orientation of the spin button is reflected in the .vertical or .horizontal style class on the main node.
Accessibility
gtk.spin_button.SpinButton uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.SpinButton role.
A gtk.spinner.Spinner widget displays an icon-size spinning animation.
It is often used as an alternative to a gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.
To start the animation, use gtk.spinner.Spinner.start, to stop it use gtk.spinner.Spinner.stop.
CSS nodes
gtk.spinner.Spinner has a single CSS node with the name spinner. When the animation is active, the :checked pseudoclass is added to this node.
gtk.stack.Stack is a container which only shows one of its children at a time.
In contrast to gtk.notebook.Notebook, gtk.stack.Stack does not provide a means for users to change the visible child. Instead, a separate widget such as gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher or gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar can be used with gtk.stack.Stack to provide this functionality.
Transitions between pages can be animated as slides or fades. This can be controlled with gtk.stack.Stack.setTransitionType. These animations respect the gtk.settings.Settings.gtkEnableAnimations setting.
gtk.stack.Stack maintains a gtk.stack_page.StackPage object for each added child, which holds additional per-child properties. You obtain the gtk.stack_page.StackPage for a child with gtk.stack.Stack.getPage and you can obtain a gtk.selection_model.SelectionModel containing all the pages with gtk.stack.Stack.getPages.
GtkStack as GtkBuildable
To set child-specific properties in a .ui file, create gtk.stack_page.StackPage objects explicitly, and set the child widget as a property on it:
<object class="GtkStack" id="stack">
<child>
<object class="GtkStackPage">
<property name="name">page1</property>
<property name="title">In the beginning…</property>
<property name="child">
<object class="GtkLabel">
<property name="label">It was dark</property>
</object>
</property>
</object>
</child>CSS nodes
gtk.stack.Stack has a single CSS node named stack.
Accessibility
gtk.stack.Stack uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TabPanel for the stack pages, which are the accessible parent objects of the child widgets.
gtk.stack_page.StackPage is an auxiliary class used by gtk.stack.Stack.
A gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar uses a sidebar to switch between gtk.stack.Stack pages.
In order to use a gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar, you simply use a gtk.stack.Stack to organize your UI flow, and add the sidebar to your sidebar area. You can use gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar.setStack to connect the gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar to the gtk.stack.Stack.
CSS nodes
gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar has a single CSS node with name stacksidebar and style class .sidebar.
When circumstances require it, gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar adds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.
The gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher shows a row of buttons to switch between gtk.stack.Stack pages.
It acts as a controller for the associated gtk.stack.Stack.
All the content for the buttons comes from the properties of the stacks gtk.stack_page.StackPage objects; the button visibility in a gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher widget is controlled by the visibility of the child in the gtk.stack.Stack.
It is possible to associate multiple gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher widgets with the same gtk.stack.Stack widget.
CSS nodes
gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher has a single CSS node named stackswitcher and style class .stack-switcher.
When circumstances require it, gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher adds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.
Accessibility
gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TabList role and uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Tab for its buttons.
Orientable
Since GTK 4.4, gtk.stack_switcher.StackSwitcher implements gtk.orientable.Orientable allowing the stack switcher to be made vertical with [gtk.orientable.Orientable.setOrientation].
A gtk.statusbar.Statusbar widget is usually placed along the bottom of an application's main gtk.window.Window.
A GtkStatusBar may provide a regular commentary of the application's status (as is usually the case in a web browser, for example), or may be used to simply output a message when the status changes, (when an upload is complete in an FTP client, for example).
Status bars in GTK maintain a stack of messages. The message at the top of the each bar’s stack is the one that will currently be displayed.
Any messages added to a statusbar’s stack must specify a context id that is used to uniquely identify the source of a message. This context id can be generated by gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.getContextId, given a message and the statusbar that it will be added to. Note that messages are stored in a stack, and when choosing which message to display, the stack structure is adhered to, regardless of the context identifier of a message.
One could say that a statusbar maintains one stack of messages for display purposes, but allows multiple message producers to maintain sub-stacks of the messages they produced (via context ids).
Status bars are created using gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.new_.
Messages are added to the bar’s stack with gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.push.
The message at the top of the stack can be removed using gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.pop. A message can be removed from anywhere in the stack if its message id was recorded at the time it was added. This is done using gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.remove.
CSS node
gtk.statusbar.Statusbar has a single CSS node with name statusbar.
Deprecated
gtk.string_filter.StringFilter determines whether to include items by comparing strings to a fixed search term.
The strings are obtained from the items by evaluating a gtk.expression.Expression set with gtk.string_filter.StringFilter.setExpression, and they are compared against a search term set with gtk.string_filter.StringFilter.setSearch.
gtk.string_filter.StringFilter has several different modes of comparison - it can match the whole string, just a prefix, or any substring. Use gtk.string_filter.StringFilter.setMatchMode choose a mode.
It is also possible to make case-insensitive comparisons, with gtk.string_filter.StringFilter.setIgnoreCase.
GtkFilterClass parentClassgtk.string_list.StringList is a list model that wraps an array of strings.
The objects in the model are of type gtk.string_object.StringObject and have a "string" property that can be used inside expressions.
gtk.string_list.StringList is well-suited for any place where you would typically use a char*[], but need a list model.
GtkStringList as GtkBuildable
The gtk.string_list.StringList implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports adding items directly using the <items> element and specifying <item> elements for each item. Each <item> element supports the regular translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.
Here is a UI definition fragment specifying a gtk.string_list.StringList
<object class="GtkStringList">
<items>
<item translatable="yes">Factory</item>
<item translatable="yes">Home</item>
<item translatable="yes">Subway</item>
</items>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassgtk.string_object.StringObject is the type of items in a gtk.string_list.StringList.
A gtk.string_object.StringObject is a wrapper around a const char*; it has a gtk.string_object.StringObject.string_ property that can be used for property bindings and expressions.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.string_sorter.StringSorter is a gtk.sorter.Sorter that compares strings.
It does the comparison in a linguistically correct way using the current locale by normalizing Unicode strings and possibly case-folding them before performing the comparison.
To obtain the strings to compare, this sorter evaluates a gtk.expression.Expression.
GtkSorterClass parentClassgtk.style_context.StyleContext stores styling information affecting a widget.
In order to construct the final style information, gtk.style_context.StyleContext queries information from all attached GtkStyleProviders. Style providers can be either attached explicitly to the context through gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProvider, or to the display through gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProviderForDisplay. The resulting style is a combination of all providers’ information in priority order.
For GTK widgets, any gtk.style_context.StyleContext returned by gtk.widget.Widget.getStyleContext will already have a gdk.display.Display and RTL/LTR information set. The style context will also be updated automatically if any of these settings change on the widget.
Style Classes
Widgets can add style classes to their context, which can be used to associate different styles by class. The documentation for individual widgets lists which style classes it uses itself, and which style classes may be added by applications to affect their appearance.
Custom styling in UI libraries and applications
If you are developing a library with custom widgets that render differently than standard components, you may need to add a gtk.style_provider.StyleProvider yourself with the gtk.types.STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK priority, either a gtk.css_provider.CssProvider or a custom object implementing the gtk.style_provider.StyleProvider interface. This way themes may still attempt to style your UI elements in a different way if needed so.
If you are using custom styling on an applications, you probably want then to make your style information prevail to the theme’s, so you must use a gtk.style_provider.StyleProvider with the gtk.types.STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION priority, keep in mind that the user settings in XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0/gtk.css will still take precedence over your changes, as it uses the gtk.types.STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER priority.
Deprecated
where applicable; otherwise, there is no replacement for querying the style machinery. Stylable UI elements should use widgets.
GObject parentObjectGObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkStyleContext * context) changedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4gtk.style_provider.StyleProvider is an interface for style information used by gtk.style_context.StyleContext.
See gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProvider and gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProviderForDisplay for adding GtkStyleProviders.
GTK uses the gtk.style_provider.StyleProvider implementation for CSS in gtk.css_provider.CssProvider.
gtk.switch_.Switch is a "light switch" that has two states: on or off.
The user can control which state should be active by clicking the empty area, or by dragging the handle.
gtk.switch_.Switch can also handle situations where the underlying state changes with a delay. In this case, the slider position indicates the user's recent change (as indicated by the gtk.switch_.Switch.active property), and the color indicates whether the underlying state (represented by the gtk.switch_.Switch.state property) has been updated yet.
!GtkSwitch with delayed state change
See gtk.switch_.Switch.stateSet for details.
CSS nodes
switch
├── image
├── image
╰── slidergtk.switch_.Switch has four css nodes, the main node with the name switch and subnodes for the slider and the on and off images. Neither of them is using any style classes.
Accessibility
gtk.switch_.Switch uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Switch role.
gtk.symbolic_paintable.SymbolicPaintable is an interface that support symbolic colors in paintables.
gdk.paintable.Paintables implementing the interface will have the vfunc@Gtk.SymbolicPaintable.snapshot_symbolic function called and have the colors for drawing symbolic icons passed. At least 4 colors are guaranteed to be passed every time.
These 4 colors are the foreground color, and the colors to use for errors, warnings and success information in that order.
More colors may be added in the future.
The list of virtual functions for the gtk.symbolic_paintable.SymbolicPaintable interface. No function must be implemented, default implementations exist for each one.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkSymbolicPaintable * paintable, GdkSnapshot * snapshot, double width, double height, const(GdkRGBA) * colors, size_t nColors) snapshotSymbolicSnapshot the paintable using the given colors. See `GtkSymbolicPaintable::snapshot_symbolic()` for details. If this function is not implemented, `vfunc@Gdk.Paintable.snapshot` will be called.The gtk.text.Text widget is a single-line text entry widget.
gtk.text.Text is the common implementation of single-line text editing that is shared between gtk.entry.Entry, gtk.password_entry.PasswordEntry, gtk.spin_button.SpinButton, and other widgets. In all of these, gtk.text.Text is used as the delegate for the gtk.editable.Editable implementation.
A fairly large set of key bindings are supported by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor position is visible.
When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information, it can be put into “password mode” using gtk.text.Text.setVisibility. In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character. By default, GTK picks the best invisible character that is available in the current font, but it can be changed with gtk.text.Text.setInvisibleChar.
If you are looking to add icons or progress display in an entry, look at gtk.entry.Entry. There other alternatives for more specialized use cases, such as gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry.
If you need multi-line editable text, look at gtk.text_view.TextView.
CSS nodes
text[.read-only]
├── placeholder
├── undershoot.left
├── undershoot.right
├── [selection]
├── [block-cursor]
╰── [window.popup]gtk.text.Text has a main node with the name text. Depending on the properties of the widget, the .read-only style class may appear.
When the entry has a selection, it adds a subnode with the name selection.
When the entry is in overwrite mode, it adds a subnode with the name block-cursor that determines how the block cursor is drawn.
The CSS node for a context menu is added as a subnode with the name popup.
The undershoot nodes are used to draw the underflow indication when content is scrolled out of view. These nodes get the .left or .right style class added depending on where the indication is drawn.
When touch is used and touch selection handles are shown, they are using CSS nodes with name cursor-handle. They get the .top or .bottom style class depending on where they are shown in relation to the selection. If there is just a single handle for the text cursor, it gets the style class .insertion-cursor.
Accessibility
gtk.text.Text uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.None role, which causes it to be skipped for accessibility. This is because gtk.text.Text is expected to be used as a delegate for a gtk.editable.Editable implementation that will be represented to accessibility.
GtkWidget parentInstanceStores text and attributes for display in a gtk.text_view.TextView.
You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
GtkTextBuffer can support undoing changes to the buffer content, see gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.setEnableUndo.
The class structure for gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.
GObjectClass parentClassThe object class structure needs to be the first.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * pos, const(char) * newText, int newTextLength) insertTextThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::insert-text` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * iter, GdkPaintable * paintable) insertPaintableThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::insert-paintable` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * iter, GtkTextChildAnchor * anchor) insertChildAnchorThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::insert-child-anchor` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * start, GtkTextIter * end) deleteRangeThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::delete-range` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) changedThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::changed` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) modifiedChangedThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::modified-changed` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, const(GtkTextIter) * location, GtkTextMark * mark) markSetThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::mark-set` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextMark * mark) markDeletedThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::mark-deleted` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextTag * tag, const(GtkTextIter) * start, const(GtkTextIter) * end) applyTagThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::apply-tag` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextTag * tag, const(GtkTextIter) * start, const(GtkTextIter) * end) removeTagThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::remove-tag` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) beginUserActionThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::begin-user-action` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) endUserActionThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::end-user-action` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GdkClipboard * clipboard) pasteDoneThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::paste-done` signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) undoThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::undo` signalvoid function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) redoThe class handler for the `GtkTextBuffer::redo` signalvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A gtk.text_child_anchor.TextChildAnchor is a spot in a gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer where child widgets can be “anchored”.
The anchor can have multiple widgets anchored, to allow for multiple views.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4An iterator for the contents of a gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.
You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
void * dummy1void * dummy2int dummy3int dummy4int dummy5int dummy6int dummy7int dummy8void * dummy9void * dummy10int dummy11int dummy12int dummy13void * dummy14A gtk.text_mark.TextMark is a position in a GtkTextbuffer that is preserved across modifications.
You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
A gtk.text_mark.TextMark is like a bookmark in a text buffer; it preserves a position in the text. You can convert the mark to an iterator using gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.getIterAtMark. Unlike iterators, marks remain valid across buffer mutations, because their behavior is defined when text is inserted or deleted. When text containing a mark is deleted, the mark remains in the position originally occupied by the deleted text. When text is inserted at a mark, a mark with “left gravity” will be moved to the beginning of the newly-inserted text, and a mark with “right gravity” will be moved to the end.
Note that “left” and “right” here refer to logical direction (left is the toward the start of the buffer); in some languages such as Hebrew the logically-leftmost text is not actually on the left when displayed.
Marks are reference counted, but the reference count only controls the validity of the memory; marks can be deleted from the buffer at any time with gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.deleteMark. Once deleted from the buffer, a mark is essentially useless.
Marks optionally have names; these can be convenient to avoid passing the gtk.text_mark.TextMark object around.
Marks are typically created using the gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.createMark function.
A tag that can be applied to text contained in a gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.
You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
Tags should be in the gtk.text_tag_table.TextTagTable for a given gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer before using them with that buffer.
gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.createTag is the best way to create tags. See “gtk4-demo” for numerous examples.
For each property of gtk.text_tag.TextTag, there is a “set” property, e.g. “font-set” corresponds to “font”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not.
They are maintained by GTK and you should not set them independently.
The collection of tags in a gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer
You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
GtkTextTagTables as GtkBuildable
The gtk.text_tag_table.TextTagTable implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports adding tags by specifying “tag” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying tags:
<object class="GtkTextTagTable">
<child type="tag">
<object class="GtkTextTag"/>
</child>
</object>A widget that displays the contents of a gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.
You may wish to begin by reading the conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
CSS nodes
textview.view
├── border.top
├── border.left
├── text
│ ╰── [selection]
├── border.right
├── border.bottom
╰── [window.popup]gtk.text_view.TextView has a main css node with name textview and style class .view, and subnodes for each of the border windows, and the main text area, with names border and text, respectively. The border nodes each get one of the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom.
A node representing the selection will appear below the text node.
If a context menu is opened, the window node will appear as a subnode of the main node.
Accessibility
gtk.text_view.TextView uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.TextBox role.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassThe object class structure needs to be the firstvoid function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkMovementStep step, int count, gboolean extendSelection) moveCursorThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::move-cursor` keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) setAnchorThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::set-anchor` keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView, const(char) * str) insertAtCursorThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::insert-at-cursor` keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkDeleteType type, int count) deleteFromCursorThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::delete-from-cursor` keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) backspaceThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::backspace` keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) cutClipboardThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::cut-clipboard` keybinding signalvoid function(GtkTextView * textView) copyClipboardThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::copy-clipboard` keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) pasteClipboardThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::paste-clipboard` keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) toggleOverwriteThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::toggle-overwrite` keybinding signal.GtkTextBuffer * function(GtkTextView * textView) createBufferThe create_buffer vfunc is called to create a [gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer] for the text view. The default implementation is to just call [gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.new_].void function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkTextViewLayer layer, GtkSnapshot * snapshot) snapshotLayerThe snapshot_layer vfunc is called before and after the text view is drawing its own text. Applications can override this vfunc in a subclass to draw customized content underneath or above the text...gboolean function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkTextExtendSelection granularity, const(GtkTextIter) * location, GtkTextIter * start, GtkTextIter * end) extendSelectionThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::extend-selection` signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) insertEmojiThe class handler for the `GtkTextView::insert-emoji` signal.void *[8] paddingA gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton is a button which remains “pressed-in” when clicked.
Clicking again will cause the toggle button to return to its normal state.
A toggle button is created by calling either gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.new_ or gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.newWithLabel. If using the former, it is advisable to pack a widget, (such as a gtk.label.Label and/or a gtk.image.Image), into the toggle button’s container. (See gtk.button.Button for more information).
The state of a gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton can be set specifically using gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.setActive, and retrieved using gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.getActive.
To simply switch the state of a toggle button, use gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.toggled.
Grouping
Toggle buttons can be grouped together, to form mutually exclusive groups - only one of the buttons can be toggled at a time, and toggling another one will switch the currently toggled one off.
To add a gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton to a group, use gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.setGroup.
CSS nodes
gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain gtk.button.Button, it gets the .toggle style class.
Accessibility
gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.ToggleButton role.
Creating two gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton widgets.
static void
output_state (GtkToggleButton *source,
gpointer user_data)
{
g_print ("Toggle button "%s" is active: %s",
gtk_button_get_label (GTK_BUTTON (source)),
gtk_toggle_button_get_active (source) ? "Yes" : "No");
}
static void
make_toggles (void)
{
GtkWidget *window, *toggle1, *toggle2;
GtkWidget *box;
const char *text;
window = gtk_window_new ();
box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 12);
text = "Hi, I’m toggle button one";
toggle1 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);
g_signal_connect (toggle1, "toggled",
G_CALLBACK (output_state),
NULL);
gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (box), toggle1);
text = "Hi, I’m toggle button two";
toggle2 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);
g_signal_connect (toggle2, "toggled",
G_CALLBACK (output_state),
NULL);
gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (box), toggle2);
gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), box);
gtk_window_present (GTK_WINDOW (window));
}GtkButton buttonGtkButtonClass parentClassvoid function(GtkToggleButton * toggleButton) toggledvoid *[8] paddinggtk.tooltip.Tooltip is an object representing a widget tooltip.
Basic tooltips can be realized simply by using gtk.widget.Widget.setTooltipText or gtk.widget.Widget.setTooltipMarkup without any explicit tooltip object.
When you need a tooltip with a little more fancy contents, like adding an image, or you want the tooltip to have different contents per gtk.tree_view.TreeView row or cell, you will have to do a little more work:
- Set the gtk.widget.Widget.hasTooltip property to true. This will make GTK monitor the widget for motion and related events which are needed to determine when and where to show a tooltip.
- Connect to the gtk.widget.Widget.queryTooltip signal. This signal will be emitted when a tooltip is supposed to be shown. One of the arguments passed to the signal handler is a gtk.tooltip.Tooltip object. This is the object that we are about to display as a tooltip, and can be manipulated in your callback using functions like gtk.tooltip.Tooltip.setIcon. There are functions for setting the tooltip’s markup, setting an image from a named icon, or even putting in a custom widget.
- Return true from your ::query-tooltip handler. This causes the tooltip to be show. If you return false, it will not be shown.
Interface for Drag-and-Drop destinations in gtk.tree_view.TreeView.
Deprecated
You can use gtk.drop_target.DropTarget to implement a drop destination
GTypeInterface gIfacegboolean function(GtkTreeDragDest * dragDest, GtkTreePath * dest, const(GValue) * value) dragDataReceivedAsks the [gtk.tree_drag_dest.TreeDragDest] to insert a row before the path dest, deriving the contents of the row from selection_data.gboolean function(GtkTreeDragDest * dragDest, GtkTreePath * destPath, const(GValue) * value) rowDropPossibleDetermines whether a drop is possible before the given dest_path, at the same depth as dest_path.Interface for Drag-and-Drop destinations in gtk.tree_view.TreeView.
Deprecated
You can use gtk.drag_source.DragSource to implement a drag source
GTypeInterface gIfacegboolean function(GtkTreeDragSource * dragSource, GtkTreePath * path) rowDraggableAsks the [gtk.tree_drag_source.TreeDragSource] whether a particular row can be used as the source of a DND operation.GdkContentProvider * function(GtkTreeDragSource * dragSource, GtkTreePath * path) dragDataGetAsks the [gtk.tree_drag_source.TreeDragSource] to fill in selection_data with a representation of the row at path.gboolean function(GtkTreeDragSource * dragSource, GtkTreePath * path) dragDataDeleteAsks the [gtk.tree_drag_source.TreeDragSource] to delete the row at path, because it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop.gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander is a widget that provides an expander for a list.
It is typically placed as a bottommost child into a gtk.list_view.ListView to allow users to expand and collapse children in a list with a gtk.tree_list_model.TreeListModel. gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander provides the common UI elements, gestures and keybindings for this purpose.
On top of this, the "listitem.expand", "listitem.collapse" and "listitem.toggle-expand" actions are provided to allow adding custom UI for managing expanded state.
It is important to mention that you want to set the gtk.list_item.ListItem.focusable property to FALSE when using this widget, as you want the keyboard focus to be in the treexpander, and not inside the list to make use of the keybindings.
The gtk.tree_list_model.TreeListModel must be set to not be passthrough. Then it will provide gtk.tree_list_row.TreeListRow items which can be set via gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander.setListRow on the expander. The expander will then watch that row item automatically. gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander.setChild sets the widget that displays the actual row contents.
gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander can be modified with properties such as gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander.indentForIcon, gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander.indentForDepth, and gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander.hideExpander to achieve a different appearance. This can even be done to influence individual rows, for example by binding the gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander.hideExpander property to the item count of the model of the treelistrow, to hide the expander for rows without children, even if the row is expandable.
CSS nodes
treeexpander
├── [indent]*
├── [expander]
╰── <child>gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander has zero or one CSS nodes with the name "expander" that should display the expander icon. The node will be :checked when it is expanded. If the node is not expandable, an "indent" node will be displayed instead.
For every level of depth, another "indent" node is prepended.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Since GTK 4.12, gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Button role. Toggling it will change the gtk.types.AccessibleState.Expanded state.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassThe gtk.tree_iter.TreeIter is the primary structure for accessing a gtk.tree_model.TreeModel. Models are expected to put a unique integer in the @stamp member, and put model-specific data in the three @user_data members.
int stampa unique stamp to catch invalid iteratorsvoid * userDatamodel-specific datavoid * userData2model-specific datavoid * userData3model-specific datagtk.tree_list_model.TreeListModel is a list model that can create child models on demand.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.tree_list_row.TreeListRow is used by gtk.tree_list_model.TreeListModel to represent items.
It allows navigating the model as a tree and modify the state of rows.
gtk.tree_list_row.TreeListRow instances are created by a gtk.tree_list_model.TreeListModel only when the gtk.tree_list_model.TreeListModel.passthrough property is not set.
There are various support objects that can make use of gtk.tree_list_row.TreeListRow objects, such as the gtk.tree_expander.TreeExpander widget that allows displaying an icon to expand or collapse a row or gtk.tree_list_row_sorter.TreeListRowSorter that makes it possible to sort trees properly.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.tree_list_row_sorter.TreeListRowSorter is a special-purpose sorter that will apply a given sorter to the levels in a tree.
Here is an example for setting up a column view with a tree model and a GtkTreeListSorter:
column_sorter = gtk_column_view_get_sorter (view);
sorter = gtk_tree_list_row_sorter_new (g_object_ref (column_sorter));
sort_model = gtk_sort_list_model_new (tree_model, sorter);
selection = gtk_single_selection_new (sort_model);
gtk_column_view_set_model (view, G_LIST_MODEL (selection));GtkSorterClass parentClassThe tree interface used by GtkTreeView
The gtk.tree_model.TreeModel interface defines a generic tree interface for use by the gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget. It is an abstract interface, and is designed to be usable with any appropriate data structure. The programmer just has to implement this interface on their own data type for it to be viewable by a gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget.
The model is represented as a hierarchical tree of strongly-typed, columned data. In other words, the model can be seen as a tree where every node has different values depending on which column is being queried. The type of data found in a column is determined by using the GType system (ie. G_TYPE_INT, GTK_TYPE_BUTTON, G_TYPE_POINTER, etc). The types are homogeneous per column across all nodes. It is important to note that this interface only provides a way of examining a model and observing changes. The implementation of each individual model decides how and if changes are made.
In order to make life simpler for programmers who do not need to write their own specialized model, two generic models are provided — the gtk.tree_store.TreeStore and the gtk.list_store.ListStore. To use these, the developer simply pushes data into these models as necessary. These models provide the data structure as well as all appropriate tree interfaces. As a result, implementing drag and drop, sorting, and storing data is trivial. For the vast majority of trees and lists, these two models are sufficient.
Models are accessed on a node/column level of granularity. One can query for the value of a model at a certain node and a certain column on that node. There are two structures used to reference a particular node in a model. They are the gtk.tree_path.TreePath and the gtk.tree_iter.TreeIter (“iter” is short for iterator). Most of the interface consists of operations on a gtk.tree_iter.TreeIter.
A path is essentially a potential node. It is a location on a model that may or may not actually correspond to a node on a specific model. A gtk.tree_path.TreePath can be converted into either an array of unsigned integers or a string. The string form is a list of numbers separated by a colon. Each number refers to the offset at that level. Thus, the path 0 refers to the root node and the path 2:4 refers to the fifth child of the third node.
By contrast, a gtk.tree_iter.TreeIter is a reference to a specific node on a specific model. It is a generic struct with an integer and three generic pointers. These are filled in by the model in a model-specific way. One can convert a path to an iterator by calling gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.getIter. These iterators are the primary way of accessing a model and are similar to the iterators used by gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer. They are generally statically allocated on the stack and only used for a short time. The model interface defines a set of operations using them for navigating the model.
It is expected that models fill in the iterator with private data. For example, the gtk.list_store.ListStore model, which is internally a simple linked list, stores a list node in one of the pointers. The gtk.tree_model.TreeModelSort stores an array and an offset in two of the pointers. Additionally, there is an integer field. This field is generally filled with a unique stamp per model. This stamp is for catching errors resulting from using invalid iterators with a model.
The lifecycle of an iterator can be a little confusing at first. Iterators are expected to always be valid for as long as the model is unchanged (and doesn’t emit a signal). The model is considered to own all outstanding iterators and nothing needs to be done to free them from the user’s point of view. Additionally, some models guarantee that an iterator is valid for as long as the node it refers to is valid (most notably the gtk.tree_store.TreeStore and gtk.list_store.ListStore). Although generally uninteresting, as one always has to allow for the case where iterators do not persist beyond a signal, some very important performance enhancements were made in the sort model. As a result, the gtk.types.TreeModelFlags.ItersPersist flag was added to indicate this behavior.
To help show some common operation of a model, some examples are provided. The first example shows three ways of getting the iter at the location 3:2:5. While the first method shown is easier, the second is much more common, as you often get paths from callbacks.
Acquiring a gtk.tree_iter.TreeIter
// Three ways of getting the iter pointing to the location
GtkTreePath *path;
GtkTreeIter iter;
GtkTreeIter parent_iter;
// get the iterator from a string
gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model,
&iter,
"3:2:5");
// get the iterator from a path
path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("3:2:5");
gtk_tree_model_get_iter (model, &iter, path);
gtk_tree_path_free (path);
// walk the tree to find the iterator
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
NULL, 3);
parent_iter = iter;
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
&parent_iter, 2);
parent_iter = iter;
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
&parent_iter, 5);This second example shows a quick way of iterating through a list and getting a string and an integer from each row. The populate_model() function used below is not shown, as it is specific to the gtk.list_store.ListStore. For information on how to write such a function, see the gtk.list_store.ListStore documentation.
Reading data from a gtk.tree_model.TreeModel
enum
{
STRING_COLUMN,
INT_COLUMN,
N_COLUMNS
};
...
GtkTreeModel *list_store;
GtkTreeIter iter;
gboolean valid;
int row_count = 0;
// make a new list_store
list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS,
G_TYPE_STRING,
G_TYPE_INT);
// Fill the list store with data
populate_model (list_store);
// Get the first iter in the list, check it is valid and walk
// through the list, reading each row.
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (list_store,
&iter);
while (valid)
{
char *str_data;
int int_data;
// Make sure you terminate calls to gtk_tree_model_get() with a “-1” value
gtk_tree_model_get (list_store, &iter,
STRING_COLUMN, &str_data,
INT_COLUMN, &int_data,
-1);
// Do something with the data
g_print ("Row %d: (%s,%d)\n",
row_count, str_data, int_data);
g_free (str_data);
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (list_store,
&iter);
row_count++;
}The gtk.tree_model.TreeModel interface contains two methods for reference counting: gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.refNode and gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.unrefNode. These two methods are optional to implement. The reference counting is meant as a way for views to let models know when nodes are being displayed. gtk.tree_view.TreeView will take a reference on a node when it is visible, which means the node is either in the toplevel or expanded. Being displayed does not mean that the node is currently directly visible to the user in the viewport. Based on this reference counting scheme a caching model, for example, can decide whether or not to cache a node based on the reference count. A file-system based model would not want to keep the entire file hierarchy in memory, but just the folders that are currently expanded in every current view.
When working with reference counting, the following rules must be taken into account:
- Never take a reference on a node without owning a reference on its parent. This means that all parent nodes of a referenced node must be referenced as well.
- Outstanding references on a deleted node are not released. This is not possible because the node has already been deleted by the time the row-deleted signal is received.
- Models are not obligated to emit a signal on rows of which none of its siblings are referenced. To phrase this differently, signals are only required for levels in which nodes are referenced. For the root level however, signals must be emitted at all times (however the root level is always referenced when any view is attached).
Deprecated
Use gio.list_model.ListModel instead
A gtk.tree_model.TreeModel which hides parts of an underlying tree model
A gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter is a tree model which wraps another tree model, and can do the following things:
- Filter specific rows, based on data from a “visible column”, a column storing booleans indicating whether the row should be filtered or not, or based on the return value of a “visible function”, which gets a model, iter and user_data and returns a boolean indicating whether the row should be filtered or not.
- Modify the “appearance” of the model, using a modify function. This is extremely powerful and allows for just changing some values and also for creating a completely different model based on the given child model.
- Set a different root node, also known as a “virtual root”. You can pass in a gtk.tree_path.TreePath indicating the root node for the filter at construction time.
The basic API is similar to gtk.tree_model_sort.TreeModelSort. For an example on its usage, see the section on gtk.tree_model_sort.TreeModelSort.
When using gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter, it is important to realize that gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter maintains an internal cache of all nodes which are visible in its clients. The cache is likely to be a subtree of the tree exposed by the child model. gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter will not cache the entire child model when unnecessary to not compromise the caching mechanism that is exposed by the reference counting scheme. If the child model implements reference counting, unnecessary signals may not be emitted because of reference counting rule 3, see the gtk.tree_model.TreeModel documentation. (Note that e.g. gtk.tree_store.TreeStore does not implement reference counting and will always emit all signals, even when the receiving node is not visible).
Because of this, limitations for possible visible functions do apply. In general, visible functions should only use data or properties from the node for which the visibility state must be determined, its siblings or its parents. Usually, having a dependency on the state of any child node is not possible, unless references are taken on these explicitly. When no such reference exists, no signals may be received for these child nodes (see reference counting rule number 3 in the gtk.tree_model.TreeModel section).
Determining the visibility state of a given node based on the state of its child nodes is a frequently occurring use case. Therefore, gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter explicitly supports this. For example, when a node does not have any children, you might not want the node to be visible. As soon as the first row is added to the node’s child level (or the last row removed), the node’s visibility should be updated.
This introduces a dependency from the node on its child nodes. In order to accommodate this, gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter must make sure the necessary signals are received from the child model. This is achieved by building, for all nodes which are exposed as visible nodes to gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter's clients, the child level (if any) and take a reference on the first node in this level. Furthermore, for every row-inserted, row-changed or row-deleted signal (also these which were not handled because the node was not cached), gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter will check if the visibility state of any parent node has changed.
Beware, however, that this explicit support is limited to these two cases. For example, if you want a node to be visible only if two nodes in a child’s child level (2 levels deeper) are visible, you are on your own. In this case, either rely on gtk.tree_store.TreeStore to emit all signals because it does not implement reference counting, or for models that do implement reference counting, obtain references on these child levels yourself.
Deprecated
GObjectClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkTreeModelFilter * self, GtkTreeModel * childModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) visiblevoid function(GtkTreeModelFilter * self, GtkTreeModel * childModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GValue * value, int column) modifyvoid *[8] paddingGTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter) rowChangedSignal emitted when a row in the model has changed.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter) rowInsertedSignal emitted when a new row has been inserted in the model.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter) rowHasChildToggledSignal emitted when a row has gotten the first child row or lost its last child row.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path) rowDeletedSignal emitted when a row has been deleted.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter, int * newOrder) rowsReorderedSignal emitted when the children of a node in the GtkTreeModel have been reordered.GtkTreeModelFlags function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel) getFlagsGet [gtk.types.TreeModelFlags] supported by this interface.int function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel) getNColumnsGet the number of columns supported by the model.GType function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, int index) getColumnTypeGet the type of the column.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) getIterSets iter to a valid iterator pointing to path.GtkTreePath * function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) getPathGets a newly-created [gtk.tree_path.TreePath] referenced by iter.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, int column, GValue * value) getValueInitializes and sets value to that at column.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterNextSets iter to point to the node following it at the current level.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterPreviousSets iter to point to the previous node at the current level.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreeIter * parent) iterChildrenSets iter to point to the first child of parent.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterHasChildtrue if iter has children, false otherwise.int function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterNChildrenGets the number of children that iter has.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreeIter * parent, int n) iterNthChildSets iter to be the child of parent, using the given index.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreeIter * child) iterParentSets iter to be the parent of child.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) refNodeLets the tree ref the node.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) unrefNodeLets the tree unref the node.A GtkTreeModel which makes an underlying tree model sortable
The gtk.tree_model_sort.TreeModelSort is a model which implements the gtk.tree_sortable.TreeSortable interface. It does not hold any data itself, but rather is created with a child model and proxies its data. It has identical column types to this child model, and the changes in the child are propagated. The primary purpose of this model is to provide a way to sort a different model without modifying it. Note that the sort function used by gtk.tree_model_sort.TreeModelSort is not guaranteed to be stable.
The use of this is best demonstrated through an example. In the following sample code we create two gtk.tree_view.TreeView widgets each with a view of the same data. As the model is wrapped here by a gtk.tree_model_sort.TreeModelSort, the two gtk.tree_view.TreeViews can each sort their view of the data without affecting the other. By contrast, if we simply put the same model in each widget, then sorting the first would sort the second.
Using a gtk.tree_model_sort.TreeModelSort
{
GtkTreeView *tree_view1;
GtkTreeView *tree_view2;
GtkTreeModel *sort_model1;
GtkTreeModel *sort_model2;
GtkTreeModel *child_model;
// get the child model
child_model = get_my_model ();
// Create the first tree
sort_model1 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model);
tree_view1 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model1);
// Create the second tree
sort_model2 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model);
tree_view2 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model2);
// Now we can sort the two models independently
gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model1),
COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_ASCENDING);
gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model2),
COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_DESCENDING);
}To demonstrate how to access the underlying child model from the sort model, the next example will be a callback for the gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection GtkTreeSelection::changed signal. In this callback, we get a string from COLUMN_1 of the model. We then modify the string, find the same selected row on the child model, and change the row there.
Accessing the child model of in a selection changed callback
void
selection_changed (GtkTreeSelection *selection, gpointer data)
{
GtkTreeModel *sort_model = NULL;
GtkTreeModel *child_model;
GtkTreeIter sort_iter;
GtkTreeIter child_iter;
char *some_data = NULL;
char *modified_data;
// Get the current selected row and the model.
if (! gtk_tree_selection_get_selected (selection,
&sort_model,
&sort_iter))
return;
// Look up the current value on the selected row and get
// a new value to change it to.
gtk_tree_model_get (GTK_TREE_MODEL (sort_model), &sort_iter,
COLUMN_1, &some_data,
-1);
modified_data = change_the_data (some_data);
g_free (some_data);
// Get an iterator on the child model, instead of the sort model.
gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model),
&child_iter,
&sort_iter);
// Get the child model and change the value of the row. In this
// example, the child model is a GtkListStore. It could be any other
// type of model, though.
child_model = gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model));
gtk_list_store_set (GTK_LIST_STORE (child_model), &child_iter,
COLUMN_1, &modified_data,
-1);
g_free (modified_data);
}Deprecated
An opaque structure representing a path to a row in a model.
A GtkTreeRowReference tracks model changes so that it always refers to the same row (a gtk.tree_path.TreePath refers to a position, not a fixed row). Create a new GtkTreeRowReference with gtk.tree_row_reference.TreeRowReference.new_.
Deprecated
The selection object for GtkTreeView
The gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection object is a helper object to manage the selection for a gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget. The gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection object is automatically created when a new gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget is created, and cannot exist independently of this widget. The primary reason the gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection objects exists is for cleanliness of code and API. That is, there is no conceptual reason all these functions could not be methods on the gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget instead of a separate function.
The gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection object is gotten from a gtk.tree_view.TreeView by calling gtk.tree_view.TreeView.getSelection. It can be manipulated to check the selection status of the tree, as well as select and deselect individual rows. Selection is done completely view side. As a result, multiple views of the same model can have completely different selections. Additionally, you cannot change the selection of a row on the model that is not currently displayed by the view without expanding its parents first.
One of the important things to remember when monitoring the selection of a view is that the gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection::changed signal is mostly a hint. That is, it may only emit one signal when a range of rows is selected. Additionally, it may on occasion emit a gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection::changed signal when nothing has happened (mostly as a result of programmers calling select_row on an already selected row).
Deprecated
The interface for sortable models used by GtkTreeView
gtk.tree_sortable.TreeSortable is an interface to be implemented by tree models which support sorting. The gtk.tree_view.TreeView uses the methods provided by this interface to sort the model.
Deprecated
use gtk.sort_list_model.SortListModel to wrap your list model instead
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable) sortColumnChangedSignal emitted when the sort column or sort order of sortable is changed.gboolean function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, int * sortColumnId, GtkSortType * order) getSortColumnIdFills in sort_column_id and order with the current sort column and the order.void function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, int sortColumnId, GtkSortType order) setSortColumnIdSets the current sort column to be sort_column_id.void function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, int sortColumnId, GtkTreeIterCompareFunc sortFunc, void * userData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setSortFuncSets the comparison function used when sorting to be sort_func.void function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, GtkTreeIterCompareFunc sortFunc, void * userData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setDefaultSortFuncSets the default comparison function used when sorting to be sort_func.gboolean function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable) hasDefaultSortFunctrue if the model has a default sort function.A tree-like data structure that can be used with the gtk.tree_view.TreeView.
The gtk.tree_store.TreeStore object is a list model for use with a gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget. It implements the gtk.tree_model.TreeModel interface, and consequently, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements the gtk.tree_sortable.TreeSortable interface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree drag and drop interfaces.
gtk.tree_store.TreeStore is deprecated since GTK 4.10, and should not be used in newly written code. You should use gtk.tree_list_model.TreeListModel for a tree-like model object.
GtkTreeStore as GtkBuildable
The GtkTreeStore implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface allows to specify the model columns with a <columns> element that may contain multiple <column> elements, each specifying one model column. The “type” attribute specifies the data type for the column.
An example of a UI Definition fragment for a tree store:
<object class="GtkTreeStore">
<columns>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gint"/>
</columns>
</object>Deprecated
A widget for displaying both trees and lists
Widget that displays any object that implements the gtk.tree_model.TreeModel interface.
Please refer to the tree widget conceptual overview for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together.
Coordinate systems in GtkTreeView API
Several different coordinate systems are exposed in the gtk.tree_view.TreeView API. These are:

- Widget coordinates: Coordinates relative to the widget (usually
widget->window). - Bin window coordinates: Coordinates relative to the window that GtkTreeView renders to.
- Tree coordinates: Coordinates relative to the entire scrollable area of GtkTreeView. These coordinates start at (0, 0) for row 0 of the tree.
Several functions are available for converting between the different coordinate systems. The most common translations are between widget and bin window coordinates and between bin window and tree coordinates. For the former you can use gtk.tree_view.TreeView.convertWidgetToBinWindowCoords (and vice versa), for the latter gtk.tree_view.TreeView.convertBinWindowToTreeCoords (and vice versa).
gtk.tree_view.TreeView as gtk.buildable.Buildable
The gtk.tree_view.TreeView implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface accepts gtk.tree_view_column.TreeViewColumn objects as <child> elements and exposes the internal gtk.tree_selection.TreeSelection in UI definitions.
An example of a UI definition fragment with gtk.tree_view.TreeView:
<object class="GtkTreeView" id="treeview">
<property name="model">liststore1</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkTreeViewColumn" id="test-column">
<property name="title">Test</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkCellRendererText" id="test-renderer"/>
<attributes>
<attribute name="text">1</attribute>
</attributes>
</child>
</object>
</child>
<child internal-child="selection">
<object class="GtkTreeSelection" id="selection">
<signal name="changed" handler="on_treeview_selection_changed"/>
</object>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
treeview.view
├── header
│ ├── button
│ │ ╰── [sort-indicator]
┊ ┊
│ ╰── button
│ ╰── [sort-indicator]
│
├── [rubberband]
╰── [dndtarget]gtk.tree_view.TreeView has a main CSS node with name treeview and style class .view. It has a subnode with name header, which is the parent for all the column header widgets' CSS nodes.
Each column header consists of a button, which among other content, has a child with name sort-indicator, which carries the .ascending or .descending style classes when the column header should show a sort indicator. The CSS is expected to provide a suitable image using the -gtk-icon-source property.
For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
For the drop target location during DND, a subnode with name dndtarget is used.
Deprecated
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeViewColumn * column) rowActivatedgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) testExpandRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) testCollapseRowvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) rowExpandedvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) rowCollapsedvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView) columnsChangedvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView) cursorChangedgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkMovementStep step, int count, gboolean extend, gboolean modify) moveCursorgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) selectAllgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) unselectAllgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, gboolean startEditing) selectCursorRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) toggleCursorRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, gboolean logical, gboolean expand, gboolean openAll) expandCollapseCursorRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) selectCursorParentgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) startInteractiveSearchvoid *[16] ReservedA visible column in a gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget
The gtk.tree_view_column.TreeViewColumn object represents a visible column in a gtk.tree_view.TreeView widget. It allows to set properties of the column header, and functions as a holding pen for the cell renderers which determine how the data in the column is displayed.
Please refer to the tree widget conceptual overview for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together, and to the gtk.tree_view.TreeView documentation for specifics about the CSS node structure for treeviews and their headers.
Deprecated
instead of gtk.tree_view.TreeView to show a tabular list
A gtk.uri_launcher.UriLauncher object collects the arguments that are needed to open a uri with an application.
Depending on system configuration, user preferences and available APIs, this may or may not show an app chooser dialog or launch the default application right away.
The operation is started with the gtk.uri_launcher.UriLauncher.launch function. This API follows the GIO async pattern, and the result can be obtained by calling gtk.uri_launcher.UriLauncher.launchFinish.
To launch a file, use gtk.file_launcher.FileLauncher.
GObjectClass parentClassgtk.video.Video is a widget to show a gtk.media_stream.MediaStream with media controls.
The controls are available separately as gtk.media_controls.MediaControls. If you just want to display a video without controls, you can treat it like any other paintable and for example put it into a gtk.picture.Picture.
gtk.video.Video aims to cover use cases such as previews, embedded animations, etc. It supports autoplay, looping, and simple media controls. It does not have support for video overlays, multichannel audio, device selection, or input. If you are writing a full-fledged video player, you may want to use the gdk.paintable.Paintable API and a media framework such as Gstreamer directly.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgtk.viewport.Viewport implements scrollability for widgets that lack their own scrolling capabilities.
Use gtk.viewport.Viewport to scroll child widgets such as gtk.grid.Grid, gtk.box.Box, and so on.
The gtk.viewport.Viewport will start scrolling content only if allocated less than the child widget’s minimum size in a given orientation.
CSS nodes
gtk.viewport.Viewport has a single CSS node with name viewport.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.viewport.Viewport used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Starting from GTK 4.12, gtk.viewport.Viewport uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Generic role.
gtk.volume_button.VolumeButton is a gtk.scale_button.ScaleButton subclass tailored for volume control.
Deprecated
GtkScaleButton parentThe base class for all widgets.
gtk.widget.Widget is the base class all widgets in GTK derive from. It manages the widget lifecycle, layout, states and style.
Height-for-width Geometry Management
GTK uses a height-for-width (and width-for-height) geometry management system. Height-for-width means that a widget can change how much vertical space it needs, depending on the amount of horizontal space that it is given (and similar for width-for-height). The most common example is a label that reflows to fill up the available width, wraps to fewer lines, and therefore needs less height.
Height-for-width geometry management is implemented in GTK by way of two virtual methods:
vfunc@Gtk.Widget.get_request_modevfunc@Gtk.Widget.measure
There are some important things to keep in mind when implementing height-for-width and when using it in widget implementations.
If you implement a direct gtk.widget.Widget subclass that supports height-for-width or width-for-height geometry management for itself or its child widgets, the vfunc@Gtk.Widget.get_request_mode virtual function must be implemented as well and return the widget's preferred request mode. The default implementation of this virtual function returns gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.ConstantSize, which means that the widget will only ever get -1 passed as the for_size value to its vfunc@Gtk.Widget.measure implementation.
The geometry management system will query a widget hierarchy in only one orientation at a time. When widgets are initially queried for their minimum sizes it is generally done in two initial passes in the gtk.types.SizeRequestMode chosen by the toplevel.
For example, when queried in the normal gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth mode:
First, the default minimum and natural width for each widget in the interface will be computed using gtk.widget.Widget.measure with an orientation of gtk.types.Orientation.Horizontal and a for_size of -1. Because the preferred widths for each widget depend on the preferred widths of their children, this information propagates up the hierarchy, and finally a minimum and natural width is determined for the entire toplevel. Next, the toplevel will use the minimum width to query for the minimum height contextual to that width using gtk.widget.Widget.measure with an orientation of gtk.types.Orientation.Vertical and a for_size of the just computed width. This will also be a highly recursive operation. The minimum height for the minimum width is normally used to set the minimum size constraint on the toplevel.
After the toplevel window has initially requested its size in both dimensions it can go on to allocate itself a reasonable size (or a size previously specified with gtk.window.Window.setDefaultSize). During the recursive allocation process it’s important to note that request cycles will be recursively executed while widgets allocate their children. Each widget, once allocated a size, will go on to first share the space in one orientation among its children and then request each child's height for its target allocated width or its width for allocated height, depending. In this way a gtk.widget.Widget will typically be requested its size a number of times before actually being allocated a size. The size a widget is finally allocated can of course differ from the size it has requested. For this reason, gtk.widget.Widget caches a small number of results to avoid re-querying for the same sizes in one allocation cycle.
If a widget does move content around to intelligently use up the allocated size then it must support the request in both gtk.types.SizeRequestModes even if the widget in question only trades sizes in a single orientation.
For instance, a gtk.label.Label that does height-for-width word wrapping will not expect to have vfunc@Gtk.Widget.measure with an orientation of gtk.types.Orientation.Vertical called because that call is specific to a width-for-height request. In this case the label must return the height required for its own minimum possible width. By following this rule any widget that handles height-for-width or width-for-height requests will always be allocated at least enough space to fit its own content.
Here are some examples of how a gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth widget generally deals with width-for-height requests:
static void
foo_widget_measure (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkOrientation orientation,
int for_size,
int *minimum_size,
int *natural_size,
int *minimum_baseline,
int *natural_baseline)
{
if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL)
{
// Calculate minimum and natural width
}
else // VERTICAL
{
if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
{
int min_width, dummy;
// First, get the minimum width of our widget
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->measure (widget, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, -1,
&min_width, &dummy, &dummy, &dummy);
// Now use the minimum width to retrieve the minimum and natural height to display
// that width.
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->measure (widget, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, min_width,
minimum_size, natural_size, &dummy, &dummy);
}
else
{
// ... some widgets do both.
}
}
}Often a widget needs to get its own request during size request or allocation. For example, when computing height it may need to also compute width. Or when deciding how to use an allocation, the widget may need to know its natural size. In these cases, the widget should be careful to call its virtual methods directly, like in the code example above.
It will not work to use the wrapper function gtk.widget.Widget.measure inside your own vfunc@Gtk.Widget.size_allocate implementation. These return a request adjusted by gtk.size_group.SizeGroup, the widget's align and expand flags, as well as its CSS style.
If a widget used the wrappers inside its virtual method implementations, then the adjustments (such as widget margins) would be applied twice. GTK therefore does not allow this and will warn if you try to do it.
Of course if you are getting the size request for another widget, such as a child widget, you must use gtk.widget.Widget.measure; otherwise, you would not properly consider widget margins, gtk.size_group.SizeGroup, and so forth.
GTK also supports baseline vertical alignment of widgets. This means that widgets are positioned such that the typographical baseline of widgets in the same row are aligned. This happens if a widget supports baselines, has a vertical alignment using baselines, and is inside a widget that supports baselines and has a natural “row” that it aligns to the baseline, or a baseline assigned to it by the grandparent.
Baseline alignment support for a widget is also done by the vfunc@Gtk.Widget.measure virtual function. It allows you to report both a minimum and natural size.
If a widget ends up baseline aligned it will be allocated all the space in the parent as if it was gtk.types.Align.Fill, but the selected baseline can be found via gtk.widget.Widget.getBaseline. If the baseline has a value other than -1 you need to align the widget such that the baseline appears at the position.
GtkWidget as GtkBuildable
The gtk.widget.Widget implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports various custom elements to specify additional aspects of widgets that are not directly expressed as properties.
If the widget uses a gtk.layout_manager.LayoutManager, gtk.widget.Widget supports a custom <layout> element, used to define layout properties:
<object class="GtkGrid" id="my_grid">
<child>
<object class="GtkLabel" id="label1">
<property name="label">Description</property>
<layout>
<property name="column">0</property>
<property name="row">0</property>
<property name="row-span">1</property>
<property name="column-span">1</property>
</layout>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkEntry" id="description_entry">
<layout>
<property name="column">1</property>
<property name="row">0</property>
<property name="row-span">1</property>
<property name="column-span">1</property>
</layout>
</object>
</child>
</object>gtk.widget.Widget allows style information such as style classes to be associated with widgets, using the custom <style> element:
<object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
<style>
<class name="my-special-button-class"/>
<class name="dark-button"/>
</style>
</object>gtk.widget.Widget allows defining accessibility information, such as properties, relations, and states, using the custom <accessibility> element:
<object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
<accessibility>
<property name="label">Download</property>
<relation name="labelled-by">label1</relation>
</accessibility>
</object>Building composite widgets from template XML
GtkWidget exposes some facilities to automate the procedure of creating composite widgets using "templates".
To create composite widgets with gtk.builder.Builder XML, one must associate the interface description with the widget class at class initialization time using gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.setTemplate.
The interface description semantics expected in composite template descriptions is slightly different from regular gtk.builder.Builder XML.
Unlike regular interface descriptions, gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.setTemplate will expect a <template> tag as a direct child of the toplevel <interface> tag. The <template> tag must specify the “class” attribute which must be the type name of the widget. Optionally, the “parent” attribute may be specified to specify the direct parent type of the widget type; this is ignored by gtk.builder.Builder but can be used by UI design tools to introspect what kind of properties and internal children exist for a given type when the actual type does not exist.
The XML which is contained inside the <template> tag behaves as if it were added to the <object> tag defining the widget itself. You may set properties on a widget by inserting <property> tags into the <template> tag, and also add <child> tags to add children and extend a widget in the normal way you would with <object> tags.
Additionally, <object> tags can also be added before and after the initial <template> tag in the normal way, allowing one to define auxiliary objects which might be referenced by other widgets declared as children of the <template> tag.
Since, unlike the <object> tag, the <template> tag does not contain an “id” attribute, if you need to refer to the instance of the object itself that the template will create, simply refer to the template class name in an applicable element content.
Here is an example of a template definition, which includes an example of this in the <signal> tag:
<interface>
<template class="FooWidget" parent="GtkBox">
<property name="orientation">horizontal</property>
<property name="spacing">4</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="hello_button">
<property name="label">Hello World</property>
<signal name="clicked" handler="hello_button_clicked" object="FooWidget" swapped="yes"/>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="goodbye_button">
<property name="label">Goodbye World</property>
</object>
</child>
</template>
</interface>Typically, you'll place the template fragment into a file that is bundled with your project, using gio.resource.Resource. In order to load the template, you need to call gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.setTemplateFromResource from the class initialization of your gtk.widget.Widget type:
static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
// ...
gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
"/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
}You will also need to call gtk.widget.Widget.initTemplate from the instance initialization function:
static void
foo_widget_init (FooWidget *self)
{
gtk_widget_init_template (GTK_WIDGET (self));
// Initialize the rest of the widget...
}as well as calling gtk.widget.Widget.disposeTemplate from the dispose function:
static void
foo_widget_dispose (GObject *gobject)
{
FooWidget *self = FOO_WIDGET (gobject);
// Dispose objects for which you have a reference...
// Clear the template children for this widget type
gtk_widget_dispose_template (GTK_WIDGET (self), FOO_TYPE_WIDGET);
G_OBJECT_CLASS (foo_widget_parent_class)->dispose (gobject);
}You can access widgets defined in the template using the gtk.widget.Widget.getTemplateChild function, but you will typically declare a pointer in the instance private data structure of your type using the same name as the widget in the template definition, and call gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.bindTemplateChildFull (or one of its wrapper macros func@Gtk.widget_class_bind_template_child and func@Gtk.widget_class_bind_template_child_private) with that name, e.g.
typedef struct {
GtkWidget *hello_button;
GtkWidget *goodbye_button;
} FooWidgetPrivate;
G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_PRIVATE (FooWidget, foo_widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)
static void
foo_widget_dispose (GObject *gobject)
{
gtk_widget_dispose_template (GTK_WIDGET (gobject), FOO_TYPE_WIDGET);
G_OBJECT_CLASS (foo_widget_parent_class)->dispose (gobject);
}
static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
// ...
G_OBJECT_CLASS (klass)->dispose = foo_widget_dispose;
gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
"/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
FooWidget, hello_button);
gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
FooWidget, goodbye_button);
}
static void
foo_widget_init (FooWidget *widget)
{
gtk_widget_init_template (GTK_WIDGET (widget));
}You can also use gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.bindTemplateCallbackFull (or is wrapper macro func@Gtk.widget_class_bind_template_callback) to connect a signal callback defined in the template with a function visible in the scope of the class, e.g.
// the signal handler has the instance and user data swapped
// because of the swapped="yes" attribute in the template XML
static void
hello_button_clicked (FooWidget *self,
GtkButton *button)
{
g_print ("Hello, world!\n");
}
static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
// ...
gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
"/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), hello_button_clicked);
}GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassThe object class structure needs to be the first element in the widget class structure in order for the class mechanism to work correctly. This allows a GtkWidgetClass pointer to be cast to a GObje...void function(GtkWidget * widget) showSignal emitted when widget is shownvoid function(GtkWidget * widget) hideSignal emitted when widget is hidden.void function(GtkWidget * widget) mapSignal emitted when widget is going to be mapped, that is when the widget is visible (which is controlled with [gtk.widget.Widget.setVisible]) and all its parents up to the toplevel widget are also...void function(GtkWidget * widget) unmapSignal emitted when widget is going to be unmapped, which means that either it or any of its parents up to the toplevel widget have been set as hidden.void function(GtkWidget * widget) realizeSignal emitted when widget is associated with a [gdk.surface.Surface], which means that [gtk.widget.Widget.realize] has been called or the widget has been mapped (that is, it is going to be drawn).void function(GtkWidget * widget) unrealizeSignal emitted when the GdkSurface associated with widget is destroyed, which means that [gtk.widget.Widget.unrealize] has been called or the widget has been unmapped (that is, it is going to be hi...void function(GtkWidget * widget) rootCalled when the widget gets added to a [gtk.root.Root] widget. Must chain upvoid function(GtkWidget * widget) unrootCalled when the widget is about to be removed from its [gtk.root.Root] widget. Must chain upvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, int width, int height, int baseline) sizeAllocateCalled to set the allocation, if the widget does not have a layout manager.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkStateFlags previousStateFlags) stateFlagsChangedSignal emitted when the widget state changes, see [gtk.widget.Widget.getStateFlags].void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkTextDirection previousDirection) directionChangedSignal emitted when the text direction of a widget changes.GtkSizeRequestMode function(GtkWidget * widget) getRequestModeCalled to get the request mode, if the widget does not have a layout manager. This allows a widget to tell its parent container whether it prefers to be allocated in [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.Heig...void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkOrientation orientation, int forSize, int * minimum, int * natural, int * minimumBaseline, int * naturalBaseline) measureCalled to obtain the minimum and natural size of the widget, if the widget does not have a layout manager. Depending on the orientation parameter, the passed for_size can be interpreted as width or...gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, gboolean groupCycling) mnemonicActivateActivates the @widget if @group_cycling is false, and just grabs the focus if @group_cycling is true.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget) grabFocusCauses @widget to have the keyboard focus for the [gtk.window.Window] it’s inside.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkDirectionType direction) focusVfunc for [gtk.widget.Widget.childFocus]void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkWidget * child) setFocusChildSets the focused child of a widget. Must chain upvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkDirectionType direction) moveFocusSignal emitted when a change of focus is requestedgboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkDirectionType direction) keynavFailedSignal emitted if keyboard navigation fails.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, int x, int y, gboolean keyboardTooltip, GtkTooltip * tooltip) queryTooltipSignal emitted when “has-tooltip” is true and the hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering “above” widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.void function(GtkWidget * widget, gboolean * hexpandP, gboolean * vexpandP) computeExpandComputes whether a container should give this widget extra space when possible.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkCssStyleChange * change) cssChangedVfunc called when the CSS used by widget was changed. Widgets should then discard their caches that depend on CSS and queue resizes or redraws accordingly. The default implementation will take care...void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkSystemSetting settings) systemSettingChangedEmitted when a system setting was changed. Must chain up.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkSnapshot * snapshot) snapshotVfunc called when a new snapshot of the widget has to be taken.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, double x, double y) containsVfunc for [gtk.widget.Widget.contains].GtkWidgetClassPrivate * privvoid *[8] paddinggtk.widget_paintable.WidgetPaintable is a gdk.paintable.Paintable that displays the contents of a widget.
gtk.widget_paintable.WidgetPaintable will also take care of the widget not being in a state where it can be drawn (like when it isn't shown) and just draw nothing or where it does not have a size (like when it is hidden) and report no size in that case.
Of course, gtk.widget_paintable.WidgetPaintable allows you to monitor widgets for size changes by emitting the gdk.paintable.Paintable.invalidateSize signal whenever the size of the widget changes as well as for visual changes by emitting the gdk.paintable.Paintable.invalidateContents signal whenever the widget changes.
You can use a gtk.widget_paintable.WidgetPaintable everywhere a gdk.paintable.Paintable is allowed, including using it on a gtk.picture.Picture (or one of its parents) that it was set on itself via gtk.picture.Picture.setPaintable. The paintable will take care of recursion when this happens. If you do this however, ensure that the gtk.picture.Picture.canShrink property is set to true or you might end up with an infinitely growing widget.
GObjectClass parentClassA gtk.window.Window is a toplevel window which can contain other widgets.
Windows normally have decorations that are under the control of the windowing system and allow the user to manipulate the window (resize it, move it, close it,...).
GtkWindow as GtkBuildable
The gtk.window.Window implementation of the gtk.buildable.Buildable interface supports setting a child as the titlebar by specifying “titlebar” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
CSS nodes
window.background [.csd / .solid-csd / .ssd] [.maximized / .fullscreen / .tiled]
├── <child>
╰── <titlebar child>.titlebar [.default-decoration]gtk.window.Window has a main CSS node with name window and style class .background.
Style classes that are typically used with the main CSS node are .csd (when client-side decorations are in use), .solid-csd (for client-side decorations without invisible borders), .ssd (used by mutter when rendering server-side decorations). GtkWindow also represents window states with the following style classes on the main node: .maximized, .fullscreen, .tiled (when supported, also .tiled-top, .tiled-left, .tiled-right, .tiled-bottom).
gtk.window.Window subclasses often add their own discriminating style classes, such as .dialog, .popup or .tooltip.
Generally, some CSS properties don't make sense on the toplevel window node, such as margins or padding. When client-side decorations without invisible borders are in use (i.e. the .solid-csd style class is added to the main window node), the CSS border of the toplevel window is used for resize drags. In the .csd case, the shadow area outside of the window can be used to resize it.
gtk.window.Window adds the .titlebar and .default-decoration style classes to the widget that is added as a titlebar child.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.window.Window used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Window role.
Since GTK 4.12, gtk.window.Window uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Application role.
Actions
gtk.window.Window defines a set of built-in actions:
default.activate: Activate the default widget.window.minimize: Minimize the window.window.toggle-maximized: Maximize or restore the window.window.close: Close the window.
GtkWidget parentInstanceGtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkWindow * window) activateFocusActivates the current focused widget within the window.void function(GtkWindow * window) activateDefaultActivates the default widget for the window.void function(GtkWindow * window) keysChangedSignal gets emitted when the set of accelerators or mnemonics that are associated with window changes.gboolean function(GtkWindow * window, gboolean toggle) enableDebuggingClass handler for the `GtkWindow::enable-debugging` keybinding signal.gboolean function(GtkWindow * window) closeRequestClass handler for the `GtkWindow::close-request` signal.void *[8] paddinggtk.window_controls.WindowControls shows window frame controls.
Typical window frame controls are minimize, maximize and close buttons, and the window icon.
gtk.window_controls.WindowControls only displays start or end side of the controls (see gtk.window_controls.WindowControls.side), so it's intended to be always used in pair with another gtk.window_controls.WindowControls for the opposite side, for example:
<object class="GtkBox">
<child>
<object class="GtkWindowControls">
<property name="side">start</property>
</object>
</child>
...
<child>
<object class="GtkWindowControls">
<property name="side">end</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
windowcontrols
├── [image.icon]
├── [button.minimize]
├── [button.maximize]
╰── [button.close]A gtk.window_controls.WindowControls' CSS node is called windowcontrols. It contains subnodes corresponding to each title button. Which of the title buttons exist and where they are placed exactly depends on the desktop environment and gtk.window_controls.WindowControls.decorationLayout value.
When gtk.window_controls.WindowControls.empty is true, it gets the .empty style class.
Accessibility
gtk.window_controls.WindowControls uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgtk.window_group.WindowGroup makes group of windows behave like separate applications.
It achieves this by limiting the effect of GTK grabs and modality to windows in the same group.
A window can be a member in at most one window group at a time. Windows that have not been explicitly assigned to a group are implicitly treated like windows of the default window group.
gtk.window_group.WindowGroup objects are referenced by each window in the group, so once you have added all windows to a gtk.window_group.WindowGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the window group with gobject.object.ObjectWrap.unref. If the windows in the window group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the window group and drop their references on the window group; when all window have been removed, the window group will be freed.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4gtk.window_handle.WindowHandle is a titlebar area widget.
When added into a window, it can be dragged to move the window, and handles right click, double click and middle click as expected of a titlebar.
CSS nodes
gtk.window_handle.WindowHandle has a single CSS node with the name windowhandle.
Accessibility
Until GTK 4.10, gtk.window_handle.WindowHandle used the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Group role.
Starting from GTK 4.12, gtk.window_handle.WindowHandle uses the gtk.types.AccessibleRole.Generic role.
GtkWidgetClass parentClass